]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - etc/NEWS
Version number update only
[gnu-emacs] / etc / NEWS
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2003-05-21
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 See the end for copying conditions.
5
6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
7 For older news, see the file ONEWS
8 You can narrow news to the specific version by calling
9 `view-emacs-news' with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n.
10
11 Temporary note:
12 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated.
13 --- means no change in the manuals is called for.
14 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
15 so we will look at it and add it to the manual.
16
17 \f
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1
19
20 ---
21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
23 installed programs.
24
25 ---
26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
27
28 ---
29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk'
30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.4 or newer. This port
31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats).
32
33 ---
34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with Lisp code.
35
36 ---
37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
39 place for game scores to be stored. You can control this with the
40 configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses
41 to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access
42 to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately
43 in each user's home directory.
44
45 ---
46 ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution.
47 You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build
48 Emacs with Leim.
49
50 +++
51 ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution.
52
53 The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual in Info format is built as part of the
54 Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User
55 Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy
56 accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference).
57
58 ---
59 ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of
60 the distribution.
61
62 This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed,
63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
66
67 ---
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the
69 following languages: Brasilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Chinese (both
70 with simplified and traditional characters), French, and Italian.
71 Type `C-u C-h t' to choose one of them in case your language setup
72 doesn't automatically select the right one.
73
74 ---
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
76
77 ---
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand.
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'.
82
83 ---
84 ** Support for Cygwin was added.
85
86 ---
87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
88
89 ---
90 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added.
91
92 ---
93 ** Support for MacOS X was added.
94 See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
95
96 ---
97 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added.
98
99 ---
100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also
101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See
102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
103
104 ---
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types.
107
108 ---
109 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
110 much pure storage it will approximately need.
111
112 ** The script etc/emacs-buffer.gdb can be used with gdb to retrieve the
113 contents of buffers from a core dump and save them to files easily, should
114 emacs crash.
115
116 ---
117 ** The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el uses a different terminfo name.
118 The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el now uses "eterm-color" as its
119 terminfo name, since term.el now supports color.
120
121 ---
122 ** Emacs Lisp source files are compressed by default if `gzip' is available.
123
124 \f
125 * Startup Changes in Emacs 22.1
126
127 +++
128 ** New command line option -Q or --quick.
129 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables
130 the fancy startup screen.
131
132 +++
133 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display.
134 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and
135 the blinking cursor.
136
137 +++
138 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables
139 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals.
140
141 +++
142 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
143 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
144 can start with this line:
145
146 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
147
148 +++
149 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
150 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
151 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
152
153 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
154
155 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
156 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
157
158 +++
159 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
160 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
161
162 +++
163 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function,
164 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is
165 an interactively callable function.
166
167 +++
168 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
169 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
170 affects the initial frame.
171
172 +++
173 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
174 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
175 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
176 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
177 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
178
179 +++
180 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
181 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
182 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
183 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
184 `inhibit-splash-screen').
185
186 +++
187 ** The default is now to use a bitmap as the icon, so the command-line options
188 --icon-type, -i has been replaced with options --no-bitmap-icon, -nbi to turn
189 the bitmap icon off.
190
191 +++
192 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
193 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
194 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
195
196 +++
197 ** Init file changes
198 If the init file ~/.emacs does not exist, Emacs will try
199 ~/.emacs.d/init.el or ~/.emacs.d/init.elc. You can also put the shell
200 init file .emacs_SHELL under ~/.emacs.d.
201
202 +++
203 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
204 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
205 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
206 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
207 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
208 \f
209 * Incompatible Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
210
211 +++
212 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
213 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
214 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
215 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
216
217 +++
218 ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer,
219 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
220
221 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
222 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
223
224 +++
225 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
226 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
227 the operating system or your X server.
228
229 +++
230 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
231
232 +++
233 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
234 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
235 you about it.
236
237 +++
238 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
239 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
240
241 +++
242 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
243 previous mark if you set `set-mark-command-repeat-pop' to t. I.e. C-u
244 C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC
245 to set the mark immediately after a jump.
246
247 +++
248 ** The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
249 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
250
251 +++
252 ** In incremental search, C-w is changed. M-%, C-M-w and C-M-y are special.
253
254 See below under "incremental search changes".
255
256 ---
257 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
258
259 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
260 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
261 directory with Dired.
262
263 You can get the old behavior by typing C-x C-f M-n RET, which fetches
264 the actual file name into the minibuffer.
265
266 +++
267 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
268 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
269 it remains unchanged.
270
271 +++
272 ** When Emacs prompts for file names, SPC no longer completes the file name.
273 This is so filenames with embedded spaces could be input without the
274 need to quote the space with a C-q. The underlying changes in the
275 keymaps that are active in the minibuffer are described below under
276 "New keymaps for typing file names".
277
278 +++
279 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
280 M-o M-o requests refontification.
281
282 +++
283 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
284
285 See below for more details.
286
287 +++
288 ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
289 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
290 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
291 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
292 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
293 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
294 \f
295 * Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
296
297 +++
298 ** !MEM FULL! at the start of the mode line indicates that Emacs
299 cannot get any more memory for Lisp data. This often means it could
300 crash soon if you do things that use more memory. On most systems,
301 killing buffers will get out of this state. If killing buffers does
302 not make !MEM FULL! disappear, you should save your work and start
303 a new Emacs.
304
305 +++
306 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled.
307 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455).
308
309 +++
310 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left
311 (previous-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and
312 C-x right can be used as well. The functions keep a different buffer
313 cycle for each frame, using the frame-local buffer list.
314
315 +++
316 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
317
318 +++
319 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N
320 converts whitespace around point to N spaces.
321
322 ---
323 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
324 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
325
326 +++
327 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
328 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
329
330 +++
331 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
332 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
333 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
334 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
335
336 +++
337 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
338 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
339 in Indented-Text mode.
340
341 +++
342 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variable references.
343
344 Substrings of the form `$foo' and `${foo}' in the specified new value
345 now refer to the value of environment variable foo. To include a `$'
346 in the value, use `$$'.
347
348 +++
349 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
350 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
351 `same-window'.
352
353 +++
354 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
355 from the locale.
356
357 ** The command `list-faces-display' now accepts a prefix arg.
358 When passed, the function prompts for a regular expression and lists
359 only faces matching this regexp.
360
361 ** Mark command changes:
362
363 +++
364 *** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
365 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
366 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
367
368 +++
369 *** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times.
370
371 If you type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h
372 (mark-paragraph), or C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region
373 extends each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC
374 M-C-SPC, for example. This feature also works for
375 mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to a key. It also extends the
376 region when the mark is active in Transient Mark mode, regardless of
377 the last command. To start a new region with one of marking commands
378 in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the active region with C-g,
379 or set the new mark with C-SPC.
380
381 +++
382 *** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
383
384 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
385 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
386 paragraphs.
387
388 +++
389 *** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
390 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
391 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
392 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
393 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
394 command only.
395
396 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
397 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
398 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
399 mark or the region.
400
401 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
402 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
403 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
404 C-g.
405
406 +++
407 *** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
408 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
409 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
410
411 ** Help command changes:
412
413 +++
414 *** Changes in C-h bindings:
415
416 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
417
418 C-h d runs apropos-documentation.
419
420 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
421 that do not change:
422
423 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
424 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
425
426 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
427 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
428
429 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
430 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
431 run by the key sequence.
432 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
433 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
434 that command.
435
436 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
437 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
438 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
439 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
440 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
441 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
442 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
443 new-kill-line is on C-k
444
445 ---
446 *** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
447 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
448 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
449 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
450
451 +++
452 *** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for
453 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available).
454
455 +++
456 *** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is
457 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes
458 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless
459 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes
460 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is
461 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info
462 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). In
463 addition, it now makes hyperlinks to URLs as well if the URL is
464 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `URL'.
465
466 +++
467 *** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
468 description various information about a character, including its
469 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
470 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
471 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
472
473 +++
474 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
475 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
476
477 +++
478 *** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point
479 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the
480 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the
481 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more
482 keyboard oriented alternative.
483
484 +++
485 *** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to
486 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on
487 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is
488 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults
489 to one second. This feature is turned off by default.
490
491 +++
492 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match.
493 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must
494 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still
495 available.
496
497 +++
498 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items
499 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a
500 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or
501 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
502 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
503 matching item.
504
505 ** Incremental Search changes:
506
507 +++
508 *** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
509 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
510 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
511 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
512 for details.
513
514 +++
515 *** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
516 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
517 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
518 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
519
520 +++
521 *** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
522 at the end of a line.
523
524 +++
525 *** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
526 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
527 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
528
529 +++
530 *** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
531 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
532 search string used as the string to replace.
533
534 +++
535 *** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
536 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
537 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
538
539 ** Replace command changes:
540
541 ---
542 *** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
543 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
544 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
545
546 +++
547 *** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
548 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
549 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
550 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
551 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
552 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
553 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
554 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
555 can be edited for each replacement.
556
557 +++
558 *** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
559 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
560
561 ---
562 *** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
563 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
564
565 ** File operation changes:
566
567 +++
568 *** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
569 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
570 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
571 is only rarely needed.
572
573 +++
574 *** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
575 suffix from every line before processing all the lines.
576
577 +++
578 *** If the local variables list contains any variable-value pairs that
579 are not known to be safe, Emacs shows a prompt asking whether to apply
580 the local variables list as a whole. In earlier versions, a prompt
581 was only issued for variables explicitly marked as risky (for the
582 definition of risky variables, see `risky-local-variable-p').
583
584 At the prompt, the user can choose to save the contents of this local
585 variables list to `safe-local-variable-values'. This new customizable
586 option is a list of variable-value pairs that are known to be safe.
587 Variables can also be marked as safe with the existing
588 `safe-local-variable' property (see `safe-local-variable-p').
589 However, risky variables will not be added to
590 `safe-local-variable-values' in this way.
591
592 +++
593 *** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
594 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
595
596 +++
597 *** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
598 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
599
600 +++
601 *** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default.
602
603 ---
604 *** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
605
606 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
607 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
608 directory with Dired.
609
610 +++
611 *** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
612 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
613 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
614 file.)
615
616 +++
617 *** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
618 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
619
620 +++
621 *** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and
622 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument,
623 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of
624 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell
625 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET
626 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo.
627
628 ---
629 *** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation
630 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is
631 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'.
632
633 ---
634 *** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
635 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
636 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
637
638 +++
639 *** The new option `write-region-inhibit-fsync' disables calls to fsync
640 in `write-region'. This can be useful on laptops to avoid spinning up
641 the hard drive upon each file save. Enabling this variable may result
642 in data loss, use with care.
643
644 +++
645 *** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
646 Emacs asks for confirmation.
647
648 +++
649 *** require-final-newline now has two new possible values:
650
651 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed
652 when visiting the file.
653
654 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's
655 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed
656 when saving the file.
657
658 +++
659 *** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain
660 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's
661 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline
662 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline.
663 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these
664 modes do.
665
666 ** Minibuffer changes:
667
668 +++
669 *** The new file-name-shadow-mode is turned ON by default, so that when
670 entering a file name, any prefix which Emacs will ignore is dimmed.
671
672 +++
673 *** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
674 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
675 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
676 prompt string.
677
678 ---
679 *** Enhanced visual feedback in `*Completions*' buffer.
680
681 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
682 have in common and where they begin to differ.
683
684 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
685 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
686 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
687 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
688 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
689 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
690 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
691 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
692
693 Above fontification is always done when listing completions is
694 triggered at minibuffer. If you want to fontify completions whose
695 listing is triggered at the other normal buffer, you have to pass
696 the common prefix of completions to `display-completion-list' as
697 its second argument.
698
699 +++
700 *** File-name completion can now ignore specified directories.
701 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
702 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
703 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
704 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
705 candidate is a directory.
706
707 +++
708 *** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
709 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
710 it remains unchanged.
711
712 +++
713 *** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
714 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
715 elements are deleted.
716
717 ** Redisplay changes:
718
719 +++
720 *** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
721 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
722 appears between the position information and the major mode.
723
724 +++
725 *** New face `escape-glyph' highlights control characters and escape glyphs.
726
727 +++
728 *** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now displayed with a special
729 face, either nobreak-space or escape-glyph. You can turn this off or
730 specify a different mode by setting the variable `nobreak-char-display'.
731
732 +++
733 *** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
734 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
735 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
736 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
737
738 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
739 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
740 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
741 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
742 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
743 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
744
745 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
746 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
747
748 ---
749 *** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller than
750 the window now works sensibly, by automatically adjusting the window's
751 vscroll property.
752
753 +++
754 *** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
755 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
756 the mode line of the currently selected window.
757
758 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
759 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
760
761 +++
762 *** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
763 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
764 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
765 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
766 set-fringe-style.
767
768 +++
769 *** Angle icons in the fringes can indicate the buffer boundaries. In
770 addition, up and down arrow bitmaps in the fringe indicate which ways
771 the window can be scrolled.
772
773 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
774 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of
775 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'.
776
777 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
778 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp.
779
780 The value can also be an alist which specifies the presence and
781 position of each bitmap individually.
782
783 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap
784 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both
785 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the
786 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).
787
788 +++
789 *** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window
790 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into
791 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line).
792 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the
793 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline.
794
795 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' can be set to nil to
796 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines.
797
798 +++
799 *** When a window has display margin areas, the fringes are now
800 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
801 outside those margins.
802
803 +++
804 *** A window can now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
805 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
806
807 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
808 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
809 or when the frame is resized.
810
811 ** Cursor display changes:
812
813 +++
814 *** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
815 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
816
817 +++
818 *** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
819
820 +++
821 *** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
822 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
823 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
824 cursor does.
825
826 +++
827 *** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
828 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
829 appears in.
830
831 +++
832 *** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
833 of the recognized cursor types.
834
835 +++
836 *** On text terminals, the variable `visible-cursor' controls whether Emacs
837 uses the "very visible" cursor (the default) or the normal cursor.
838
839 ** New faces:
840
841 +++
842 *** `mode-line-highlight' is the standard face indicating mouse sensitive
843 elements on mode-line (and header-line) like `highlight' face on text
844 areas.
845
846 *** `mode-line-buffer-id' is the standard face for buffer identification
847 parts of the mode line.
848
849 +++
850 *** `shadow' face defines the appearance of the "shadowed" text, i.e.
851 the text which should be less noticeable than the surrounding text.
852 This can be achieved by using shades of grey in contrast with either
853 black or white default foreground color. This generic shadow face
854 allows customization of the appearance of shadowed text in one place,
855 so package-specific faces can inherit from it.
856
857 +++
858 *** `vertical-border' face is used for the vertical divider between windows.
859
860 ** Font-Lock changes:
861
862 +++
863 *** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
864 M-o M-o requests refontification.
865
866 +++
867 *** All modes now support using M-x font-lock-mode to toggle
868 fontification, even those such as Occur, Info, and comint-derived
869 modes that do their own fontification in a special way.
870
871 The variable `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable
872 fontification in Info, remove `turn-on-font-lock' from
873 `Info-mode-hook'.
874
875 +++
876 *** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the
877 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer.
878 The default value is 1.
879
880 +++
881 *** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
882 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
883 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
884 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
885 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
886
887 +++
888 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
889
890 +++
891 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-comment-delimiter-face'.
892
893 +++
894 *** Easy to overlook single character negation can now be font-locked.
895 You can use the new variable `font-lock-negation-char-face' and the face of
896 the same name to customize this. Currently the cc-modes, sh-script-mode,
897 cperl-mode and make-mode support this.
898
899 ---
900 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed.
901 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16
902 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now
903 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage
904 when Emacs is fontifying in the background.
905
906 ---
907 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
908
909 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
910 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
911 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
912 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
913
914 ---
915 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
916
917 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
918 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
919 refontification takes place.
920
921 ** Menu support:
922
923 ---
924 *** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
925 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
926 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
927 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
928 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
929 current date and time, current line and column number in the mode-line.
930
931 ---
932 *** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
933
934 ---
935 *** You can exit dialog windows and menus by typing C-g.
936
937 ---
938 *** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
939 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
940 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
941
942 +++
943 *** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
944 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
945
946 ---
947 *** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
948 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
949
950 +++
951 *** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
952 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
953 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
954
955 ---
956 *** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
957 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
958
959 +++
960 *** For the Gtk+ version, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
961 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
962 the new dialog.
963
964 ** Mouse changes:
965
966 +++
967 *** If you set the new variable `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-nil
968 value, windows are automatically selected as you move the mouse from
969 one Emacs window to another, even within a frame. A minibuffer window
970 can be selected only when it is active.
971
972 +++
973 *** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
974 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
975 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
976 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
977 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
978 to give it focus.
979
980 +++
981 *** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
982
983 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2
984 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1
985 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or
986 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed
987 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. (If you prefer the old
988 behavior, set the user option `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to nil.)
989
990 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs can do much
991 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only
992 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link"
993 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp
994 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do
995 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there
996 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could
997 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click
998 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click.
999
1000 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you
1001 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal
1002 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before
1003 you release it).
1004
1005 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original
1006 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text.
1007
1008 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options
1009 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'.
1010
1011 +++
1012 *** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
1013 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
1014 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
1015 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
1016 also disable mouse highlighting.
1017
1018 +++
1019 *** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
1020 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
1021 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
1022
1023 ---
1024 *** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
1025 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
1026
1027 ---
1028 *** Emacs ignores mouse-2 clicks while the mouse wheel is being moved.
1029
1030 People tend to push the mouse wheel (which counts as a mouse-2 click)
1031 unintentionally while turning the wheel, so these clicks are now
1032 ignored. You can customize this with the mouse-wheel-click-event and
1033 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
1034
1035 +++
1036 *** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
1037
1038 ** Multilingual Environment (Mule) changes:
1039
1040 ---
1041 *** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup
1042 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale
1043 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines.
1044 This change can result in using the different coding systems as
1045 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN).
1046
1047 +++
1048 *** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
1049 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
1050 can mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
1051 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
1052 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
1053 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
1054 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
1055 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
1056
1057 +++
1058 *** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
1059 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
1060
1061 +++
1062 *** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified
1063 coding system.
1064
1065 +++
1066 *** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
1067 of a file.
1068
1069 ---
1070 *** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
1071 unicode.
1072
1073 +++
1074 *** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
1075 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
1076 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
1077 command.
1078
1079 +++
1080 *** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
1081 in the current input method to input a character at point.
1082
1083 +++
1084 *** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
1085 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
1086 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
1087 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
1088 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
1089 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
1090 mule-unicode-... ones.
1091
1092 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
1093 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
1094 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
1095 possible.
1096
1097 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
1098 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
1099 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
1100 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
1101 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
1102
1103 ---
1104 *** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
1105 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
1106 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
1107 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
1108
1109 ---
1110 *** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
1111 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
1112 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
1113 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
1114 automatically according to the locale.)
1115
1116 ---
1117 *** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
1118 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
1119 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
1120 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
1121 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
1122 tamil-inscript.
1123
1124 ---
1125 *** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
1126 characters.
1127
1128 ---
1129 *** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is
1130 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language
1131 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to
1132 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are
1133 M-f (forward-word)
1134 M-b (backward-word)
1135 M-d (kill-word)
1136 M-DEL (backward-kill-word)
1137 M-t (transpose-words)
1138 M-q (fill-paragraph)
1139
1140 ---
1141 *** Indian support has been updated.
1142 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
1143 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
1144 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
1145 supported.
1146
1147 ---
1148 *** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
1149
1150 ---
1151 *** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
1152 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
1153 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
1154 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
1155 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
1156 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
1157 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
1158 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
1159 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
1160 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
1161 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
1162 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
1163
1164 ---
1165 *** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
1166 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
1167 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
1168
1169 ---
1170 *** Many new coding systems are available in the `code-pages' library.
1171 These include complete versions of most of those in codepage.el, based
1172 on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now obsolete and is used
1173 only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. All coding systems defined in
1174 `code-pages' are auto-loaded.
1175
1176 ---
1177 *** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
1178 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
1179
1180 ---
1181 *** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
1182 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
1183 fontset appropriately.
1184
1185 ** Customize changes:
1186
1187 +++
1188 *** Custom themes are collections of customize options. Create a
1189 custom theme with M-x customize-create-theme. Use M-x load-theme to
1190 load and enable a theme, and M-x disable-theme to disable it. Use M-x
1191 enable-theme to renable a disabled theme.
1192
1193 +++
1194 *** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
1195 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
1196 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
1197 faces.
1198
1199 ---
1200 *** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
1201 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
1202 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
1203 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
1204 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
1205 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
1206 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
1207
1208 +++
1209 *** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
1210 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
1211 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
1212 under the "[State]" button.
1213
1214 ** Buffer Menu changes:
1215
1216 +++
1217 *** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file
1218 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to T in Buffer Menu
1219 mode.
1220
1221 +++
1222 *** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
1223 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
1224 whose names begin with space are omitted.
1225
1226 ---
1227 *** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
1228 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
1229 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
1230
1231 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
1232 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
1233 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
1234 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
1235 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
1236
1237 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
1238 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
1239 t, and the status is shown.
1240
1241 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
1242 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
1243
1244 ** Dired mode:
1245
1246 ---
1247 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
1248 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
1249 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
1250
1251 +++
1252 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
1253 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
1254
1255 +++
1256 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
1257 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
1258
1259 +++
1260 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
1261 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
1262 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
1263 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
1264 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
1265 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
1266
1267 +++
1268 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
1269 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
1270
1271 +++
1272 *** In Dired-x, Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode.
1273
1274 The mode toggling command is bound to M-o. A new command
1275 dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, marks omitted files. The variable
1276 dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the mode toggling function
1277 instead.
1278
1279 +++
1280 *** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1281 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1282 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1283 directory listing into a buffer.
1284
1285 ** Comint changes:
1286
1287 ---
1288 *** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user
1289 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default,
1290 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be
1291 controlled with the new user option `ielm-prompt-read-only', which
1292 overrides `comint-prompt-read-only'.
1293
1294 The new commands `comint-kill-whole-line' and `comint-kill-region'
1295 support editing comint buffers with read-only prompts.
1296
1297 `comint-kill-whole-line' is like `kill-whole-line', but ignores both
1298 read-only and field properties. Hence, it always kill entire
1299 lines, including any prompts.
1300
1301 `comint-kill-region' is like `kill-region', except that it ignores
1302 read-only properties, if it is safe to do so. This means that if any
1303 part of a prompt is deleted, then the entire prompt must be deleted
1304 and that all prompts must stay at the beginning of a line. If this is
1305 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like
1306 `kill-region' if read-only properties are involved: it copies the text
1307 to the kill-ring, but does not delete it.
1308
1309 +++
1310 *** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1311 modes (shell-mode, etc.) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1312 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1313 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1314
1315 +++
1316 *** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed
1317 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias,
1318 but declared obsolete.
1319
1320 ** M-x Compile changes:
1321
1322 ---
1323 *** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable
1324
1325 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are
1326 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of
1327 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error'
1328 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold').
1329
1330 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes.
1331 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files.
1332 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted.
1333
1334 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If
1335 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a
1336 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
1337 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
1338 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
1339
1340 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
1341
1342 +++
1343 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
1344 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
1345 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
1346 subprocesses inherit.
1347
1348 +++
1349 *** New user option `compilation-disable-input'.
1350 If this is non-nil, send end-of-file as compilation process input.
1351
1352 +++
1353 *** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
1354 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
1355 in new face `next-error'.
1356
1357 +++
1358 *** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
1359 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
1360 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
1361 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
1362 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
1363 C-c C-f.
1364
1365 +++
1366 *** When the left fringe is displayed, an arrow points to current message in
1367 the compilation buffer.
1368
1369 +++
1370 *** The new variable `compilation-context-lines' controls lines of leading
1371 context before the current message. If nil and the left fringe is displayed,
1372 it doesn't scroll the compilation output window. If there is no left fringe,
1373 no arrow is displayed and a value of nil means display the message at the top
1374 of the window.
1375
1376 ** Occur mode changes:
1377
1378 +++
1379 *** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1380 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1381 switching to it.
1382
1383 +++
1384 *** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to
1385 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur.
1386
1387 +++
1388 *** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
1389 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
1390 `multi-occur-in-matching-buffers' which allows you to specify the
1391 buffers to search by their filenames or buffer names. Internally,
1392 Occur mode has been rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other
1393 changes.
1394
1395 ** Grep changes:
1396
1397 +++
1398 *** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
1399
1400 There's a new separate package grep.el, with its own submenu and
1401 customization group.
1402
1403 ---
1404 *** M-x grep provides highlighting support.
1405
1406 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
1407 can be saved and automatically revisited.
1408
1409 +++
1410 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
1411 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
1412
1413 ---
1414 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and
1415 `grep-scroll-output' override the corresponding compilation mode
1416 settings, for grep commands only.
1417
1418 +++
1419 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep*
1420 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
1421 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
1422 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
1423 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
1424 source line is highlighted.
1425
1426 +++
1427 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
1428 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
1429 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
1430 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
1431 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
1432 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
1433 file.
1434
1435 +++
1436 *** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1437 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1438 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1439 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1440 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1441 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1442
1443 ** X Windows Support:
1444
1445 +++
1446 *** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
1447 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
1448 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
1449
1450 +++
1451 *** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
1452 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
1453 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
1454 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
1455 Meta and Alt:
1456 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
1457 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
1458
1459 +++
1460 *** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which can
1461 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
1462
1463 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
1464 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
1465
1466 ---
1467 *** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
1468 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
1469 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
1470 and use the more appropriately result.
1471
1472 ---
1473 *** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
1474 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
1475 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
1476
1477 ** Xterm support:
1478
1479 ---
1480 *** If you enable Xterm Mouse mode, Emacs will respond to mouse clicks
1481 on the mode line, header line and display margin, when run in an xterm.
1482
1483 ---
1484 *** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm.
1485 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The
1486 following should work:
1487 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}.
1488 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on
1489 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions.
1490
1491 ** Character terminal color support changes:
1492
1493 +++
1494 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
1495 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
1496 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
1497 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
1498 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
1499 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
1500 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
1501 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
1502 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
1503
1504 ---
1505 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
1506 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
1507 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
1508 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
1509 all of these colors.
1510
1511 +++
1512 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
1513 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
1514 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
1515 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
1516 colors as on X.
1517
1518 ---
1519 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
1520 \f
1521 * New Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1
1522
1523 ** ERC is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1524
1525 ERC is a powerful, modular, and extensible IRC client for Emacs.
1526
1527 To see what modules are available, type
1528 M-x customize-option erc-modules RET.
1529
1530 To start an IRC session, type M-x erc-select, and follow the prompts
1531 for server, port, and nick.
1532
1533 ---
1534 ** Rcirc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1535
1536 Rcirc is an Internet relay chat (IRC) client. It supports
1537 simultaneous connections to multiple IRC servers. Each discussion
1538 takes place in its own buffer. For each connection you can join
1539 several channels (many-to-many) and participate in private
1540 (one-to-one) chats. Both channel and private chats are contained in
1541 separate buffers.
1542
1543 To start an IRC session, type M-x irc, and follow the prompts for
1544 server, port, nick and initial channels.
1545
1546 ---
1547 ** Newsticker is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1548
1549 Newsticker asynchronously retrieves headlines (RSS) from a list of news
1550 sites, prepares these headlines for reading, and allows for loading the
1551 corresponding articles in a web browser. Its documentation is in a
1552 separate manual.
1553
1554 +++
1555 ** savehist saves minibuffer histories between sessions.
1556 To use this feature, turn on savehist-mode in your `.emacs' file.
1557
1558 +++
1559 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
1560 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
1561 program files that include other program files.
1562
1563 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
1564 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
1565 in them.
1566
1567 +++
1568 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1569
1570 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
1571 Emacs Lisp. The prefix for Calc has been changed to `C-x *' and Calc
1572 can be started with `C-x * *'. The Calc manual is separate from the
1573 Emacs manual; within Emacs, type "C-h i m calc RET" to read the
1574 manual. A reference card is available in `etc/calccard.tex' and
1575 `etc/calccard.ps'.
1576
1577 ---
1578 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
1579 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
1580
1581 ---
1582 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1583
1584 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
1585 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
1586 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
1587 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
1588
1589 +++
1590 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
1591 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
1592
1593 ---
1594 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1595
1596 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
1597 cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo.
1598 With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement
1599 keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active
1600 region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with
1601 cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua.
1602
1603 In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible
1604 rectangle highlighting: Use C-return to start a rectangle, extend it
1605 using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x
1606 or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works).
1607
1608 Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to
1609 fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or
1610 downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the
1611 rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such
1612 as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use
1613 M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the
1614 rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands.
1615
1616 Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric
1617 prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and
1618 C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9.
1619
1620 The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in
1621 register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text.
1622
1623 Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space.
1624 When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is
1625 automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the
1626 commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands.
1627
1628 The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for
1629 kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't
1630 want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you can customize the
1631 `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable.
1632
1633 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older
1634 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you
1635 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the
1636 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file.
1637
1638 +++
1639 ** Org mode is now part of the Emacs distribution
1640
1641 Org mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining ToDo lists, and
1642 doing project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.
1643 It also contains a plain-text table editor with spreadsheet-like
1644 capabilities.
1645
1646 The Org mode table editor can be integrated into any major mode by
1647 activating the minor Orgtbl-mode.
1648
1649 The documentation for org-mode is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1650 type "C-h i m org RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1651 available in `etc/orgcard.tex' and `etc/orgcard.ps'.
1652
1653 +++
1654 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
1655 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
1656 to increment the SOA serial.
1657
1658 ---
1659 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
1660 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
1661 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
1662 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
1663 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method can
1664 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
1665
1666 +++
1667 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
1668 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
1669
1670 +++
1671 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
1672 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
1673 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
1674 +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad
1675 package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys.
1676
1677 By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup',
1678 `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by
1679 using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and
1680 the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four
1681 possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and
1682 the NumLock toggle state (off/on).
1683
1684 The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are:
1685 `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits,
1686 `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the
1687 decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization),
1688 `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args
1689 for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys'
1690 where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and
1691 `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.)
1692 are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global
1693 or local keymaps.
1694
1695 +++
1696 ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to
1697 emacs' keyboard macro facilities.
1698
1699 Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this:
1700 F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes
1701 the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value
1702 which automatically increments every time the macro is executed.
1703
1704 There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently
1705 defined macros.
1706
1707 The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which
1708 defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring,
1709 C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e,
1710 manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c,
1711 C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el
1712 for more commands.
1713
1714 The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to
1715 the keyboard macro ring.
1716
1717 The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro
1718 before calling it, if used while defining a macro.
1719
1720 In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can
1721 be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize
1722 this behavior via the variables kmacro-call-repeat-key and
1723 kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg.
1724
1725 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
1726 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
1727 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
1728
1729 ---
1730 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
1731 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
1732 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
1733
1734 +++
1735 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
1736 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
1737
1738 +++
1739 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text
1740 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines'
1741 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines,
1742 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or
1743 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines
1744 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior
1745 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is
1746 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap
1747 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil.
1748
1749 +++
1750 ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1751
1752 If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in
1753 the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced
1754 with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through
1755 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript
1756 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by
1757 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information.
1758
1759 ---
1760 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
1761 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer.
1762 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
1763 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
1764
1765 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
1766
1767 ---
1768 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
1769 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
1770 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
1771 settings.
1772
1773 +++
1774 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
1775 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
1776 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
1777 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
1778
1779 +++
1780 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
1781 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
1782
1783 +++
1784 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
1785 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
1786 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
1787 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
1788 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
1789 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
1790
1791 ** The tumme.el package allows you to easily view, tag and in other ways
1792 manipulate image files and their thumbnails, using dired as the main interface.
1793 Tumme provides functionality to generate simple image galleries.
1794
1795 +++
1796 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
1797
1798 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
1799 files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host,
1800 Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used
1801 for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for
1802 the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called
1803 `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell
1804 connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods
1805 (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or
1806 `rsync' to do the copying).
1807
1808 Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also
1809 `su' and `sudo'. Ange-FTP is still supported via the `ftp' method.
1810
1811 If you want to disable Tramp you should set
1812
1813 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp")
1814
1815 Removing Tramp, and re-enabling Ange-FTP, can be achieved by M-x
1816 tramp-unload-tramp.
1817
1818 ---
1819 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
1820
1821 ---
1822 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
1823 configuration files.
1824
1825 +++
1826 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with
1827 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value,
1828 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or
1829 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through
1830 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are
1831 recognized.
1832
1833 ---
1834 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
1835
1836 +++
1837 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
1838
1839 ---
1840 ** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
1841 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
1842
1843 ** The new package scroll-lock.el provides the Scroll Lock minor mode
1844 for pager-like scrolling. Keys which normally move point by line or
1845 paragraph will scroll the buffer by the respective amount of lines
1846 instead and point will be kept vertically fixed relative to window
1847 boundaries during scrolling.
1848 \f
1849 * Changes in Specialized Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1:
1850
1851 ** Changes in Dired
1852 *** Bindings for Tumme added
1853 Several new keybindings, all starting with the C-t prefix, have been
1854 added to Dired. They are all bound to commands in Tumme. As a starting
1855 point, mark some image files in a dired buffer and do C-t d to display
1856 thumbnails of them in a separate buffer.
1857 ** Changes in Hi Lock:
1858
1859 +++
1860 *** hi-lock-mode now only affects a single buffer, and a new function
1861 `global-hi-lock-mode' enables Hi Lock in all buffers. By default, if
1862 hi-lock-mode is used in what appears to be the initialization file, a
1863 warning message suggests to use global-hi-lock-mode instead. However,
1864 if the new variable `hi-lock-archaic-interface-deduce' is non-nil,
1865 using hi-lock-mode in an initialization file will turn on Hi Lock in all
1866 buffers and no warning will be issued (for compatibility with the
1867 behavior in older versions of Emacs).
1868
1869 ** Changes in Allout
1870
1871 *** Topic cryptography added, enabling easy gpg topic encryption and
1872 decryption. Per-topic basis enables interspersing encrypted-text and
1873 clear-text within a single file to your heart's content, using symmetric
1874 and/or public key modes. Time-limited key caching, user-provided
1875 symmetric key hinting and consistency verification, auto-encryption of
1876 pending topics on save, and more, make it easy to use encryption in
1877 powerful ways.
1878
1879 *** Default command prefix changed to "\C-c " (control-c space), to avoid
1880 intruding on user's keybinding space. Customize the
1881 `allout-command-prefix' variable to your preference.
1882
1883 *** Allout now uses text overlay's `invisible' property (and others) for
1884 concealed text, instead of selective-display. This simplifies the code, in
1885 particularly avoiding the need for kludges for isearch dynamic-display,
1886 discretionary handling of edits of concealed text, undo concerns, etc.
1887
1888 *** Many substantial fixes and refinements, including:
1889
1890 - repaired inhibition of inadvertent edits to concealed text
1891 - repaired retention of topic body hanging indent upon topic depth shifts
1892 - refuse to create "containment discontinuities", where a
1893 topic is shifted deeper than the offspring-depth of its' container
1894 - bulleting variation is simpler and more accommodating, both in the
1895 default behavior and in ability to vary when creating new topics
1896 - many internal fixes and refinements
1897 - many module and function docstring clarifications
1898 - version number incremented to 2.2
1899
1900 ** The variable `woman-topic-at-point' was renamed
1901 to `woman-use-topic-at-point' and behaves differently: if this
1902 variable is non-nil, the `woman' command uses the word at point
1903 automatically, without asking for a confirmation. Otherwise, the word
1904 at point is suggested as default, but not inserted at the prompt.
1905
1906 ---
1907 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1908
1909 *** Emacs now offers to start Scheme if the user tries to
1910 evaluate a Scheme expression but no Scheme subprocess is running.
1911
1912 *** If a file `.emacs_NAME' (where NAME is the name of the Scheme interpreter)
1913 exists in the user's home directory or in ~/.emacs.d, its
1914 contents are sent to the Scheme subprocess upon startup.
1915
1916 *** There are new commands to instruct the Scheme interpreter to trace
1917 procedure calls (`scheme-trace-procedure') and to expand syntactic forms
1918 (`scheme-expand-current-form'). The commands actually sent to the Scheme
1919 subprocess are controlled by the user options `scheme-trace-command',
1920 `scheme-untrace-command' and `scheme-expand-current-form'.
1921
1922 ---
1923 ** Makefile mode has submodes for automake, gmake, makepp, BSD make and imake.
1924
1925 The former two couldn't be differentiated before, and the latter three
1926 are new. Font-locking is robust now and offers new customizable
1927 faces.
1928
1929 +++
1930 ** In Outline mode, `hide-body' no longer hides lines at the top
1931 of the file that precede the first header line.
1932
1933 +++
1934 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet.
1935
1936 ---
1937 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved; it can
1938 run most curses applications now.
1939
1940 +++
1941 ** M-x diff uses Diff mode instead of Compilation mode.
1942
1943 +++
1944 ** You can now customize `fill-nobreak-predicate' to control where
1945 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
1946 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
1947
1948 Emacs provide two predicates, `fill-single-word-nobreak-p' and
1949 `fill-french-nobreak-p', for use as the value of
1950 `fill-nobreak-predicate'.
1951
1952 ---
1953 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering
1954 with special modes such as Tar mode.
1955
1956 ---
1957 ** Commands `winner-redo' and `winner-undo', from winner.el, are now
1958 bound to C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an
1959 incompatible change.
1960
1961 ---
1962 ** `global-whitespace-mode' is a new alias for `whitespace-global-mode'.
1963
1964 +++
1965 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
1966 resync points in both windows.
1967
1968 +++
1969 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
1970
1971 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
1972 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
1973
1974 ---
1975 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
1976 when Emacs visits them.
1977
1978 ** Info mode changes:
1979
1980 +++
1981 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
1982 with the number appended to the `*info*' buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
1983
1984 +++
1985 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
1986
1987 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
1988 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
1989 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
1990 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
1991 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
1992 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
1993 Info node.
1994
1995 ---
1996 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
1997 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
1998 search without prompting for a new search string.
1999
2000 +++
2001 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
2002 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
2003 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
2004
2005 ---
2006 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
2007
2008 ---
2009 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
2010 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
2011
2012 +++
2013 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
2014 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
2015 possible matches.
2016
2017 ---
2018 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
2019 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
2020 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
2021
2022 +++
2023 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
2024 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
2025
2026 ---
2027 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
2028 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
2029
2030 +++
2031 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
2032
2033 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
2034 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
2035
2036 ---
2037 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
2038
2039 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
2040 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
2041 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
2042
2043 +++
2044 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
2045
2046 ---
2047 *** `Info-index' offers completion.
2048
2049 ** Lisp mode changes:
2050
2051 ---
2052 *** Lisp mode now uses `font-lock-doc-face' for doc strings.
2053
2054 +++
2055 *** C-u C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-prints the list after point.
2056
2057 *** New features in evaluation commands
2058
2059 +++
2060 **** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
2061 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
2062
2063 +++
2064 **** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
2065 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
2066 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
2067 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
2068 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
2069
2070 +++
2071 ** CC mode changes.
2072
2073 *** The CC Mode manual has been extensively revised.
2074 The information about using CC Mode has been separated from the larger
2075 and more difficult chapters about configuration.
2076
2077 *** Changes in Key Sequences
2078 **** c-toggle-auto-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-t.
2079
2080 **** c-toggle-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-d.
2081 This binding has been taken over by c-hungry-delete-forwards.
2082
2083 **** c-toggle-auto-state (C-c C-t) has been renamed to c-toggle-auto-newline.
2084 c-toggle-auto-state remains as an alias.
2085
2086 **** The new commands c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forwards
2087 have key bindings C-c C-DEL (or C-c DEL, for the benefit of TTYs) and
2088 C-c C-d (or C-c C-<delete> or C-c <delete>) respectively. These
2089 commands delete entire blocks of whitespace with a single
2090 key-sequence. [N.B. "DEL" is the <backspace> key.]
2091
2092 **** The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l.
2093
2094 **** The new command c-subword-mode is bound to C-c C-w.
2095
2096 *** C-c C-s (`c-show-syntactic-information') now highlights the anchor
2097 position(s).
2098
2099 *** New Minor Modes
2100 **** Electric Minor Mode toggles the electric action of non-alphabetic keys.
2101 The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l. Turning the
2102 mode off can be helpful for editing chaotically indented code and for
2103 users new to CC Mode, who sometimes find electric indentation
2104 disconcerting. Its current state is displayed in the mode line with an
2105 'l', e.g. "C/al".
2106
2107 **** Subword Minor Mode makes Emacs recognize word boundaries at upper case
2108 letters in StudlyCapsIdentifiers. You enable this feature by C-c C-w. It can
2109 also be used in non-CC Mode buffers. :-) Contributed by Masatake YAMATO.
2110
2111 *** New clean-ups
2112
2113 **** `comment-close-slash'.
2114 With this clean-up, a block (i.e. c-style) comment can be terminated by
2115 typing a slash at the start of a line.
2116
2117 **** `c-one-liner-defun'
2118 This clean-up compresses a short enough defun (for example, an AWK
2119 pattern/action pair) onto a single line. "Short enough" is configurable.
2120
2121 *** Font lock support.
2122 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
2123 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
2124 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
2125 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
2126 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
2127 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
2128
2129 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
2130 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
2131 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
2132 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
2133 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
2134 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
2135 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
2136 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
2137 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
2138
2139 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
2140 fontification in mind; Just-In-Time-Lock mode should be enabled for
2141 the highest font lock level (by default, it is). Fontifying a file
2142 with several thousand lines in one go can take the better part of a
2143 minute.
2144
2145 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
2146 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
2147 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
2148 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
2149 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
2150 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
2151
2152 **** Support for documentation comments.
2153 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
2154 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
2155 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
2156 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
2157
2158 Currently three kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Sun's
2159 Javadoc, Autodoc (which is used in Pike) and GtkDoc (used in C). (The
2160 last was contributed by Masatake YAMATO). This is by no means a
2161 complete list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor
2162 of choice is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2163
2164 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
2165 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
2166 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
2167 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
2168 parens.
2169
2170 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
2171 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
2172 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
2173 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
2174 not as configurable as it ought to be.
2175
2176 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
2177 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
2178 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
2179 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
2180 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
2181
2182 *** Support for the AWK language.
2183 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
2184 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
2185 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
2186 Here is a summary:
2187
2188 **** Indentation Engine
2189 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
2190
2191 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
2192 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
2193 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
2194 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
2195 definition, or structured statement.
2196
2197 The predefined line-up functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
2198 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't
2199 be any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
2200
2201 **** Font Locking
2202 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
2203 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
2204 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
2205 the AWK language itself.
2206
2207 **** Comment and Movement Commands
2208 These commands all work for AWK buffers. The notion of "defun" has
2209 been augmented to include AWK pattern-action pairs - the standard
2210 "defun" commands on key sequences C-M-a, C-M-e, and C-M-h use this
2211 extended definition.
2212
2213 **** "awk" style, Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
2214 A new style, "awk" has been introduced, and this is now the default
2215 style for AWK code. With auto-newline enabled, the clean-up
2216 c-one-liner-defun (see above) is useful.
2217
2218 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
2219 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
2220 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
2221 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
2222 composition-close, and incomposition.
2223
2224 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
2225 The new functions `c-hungry-backspace' and `c-hungry-delete-forward'
2226 provide hungry deletion without having to toggle a mode. They are
2227 bound to C-c C-DEL and C-c C-d (and several variants, for the benefit
2228 of different keyboard setups. See "Changes in key sequences" above).
2229
2230 *** Better control over `require-final-newline'.
2231
2232 The variable `c-require-final-newline' specifies which of the modes
2233 implemented by CC mode should insert final newlines. Its value is a
2234 list of modes, and only those modes should do it. By default the list
2235 includes C, C++ and Objective-C modes.
2236
2237 Whichever modes are in this list will set `require-final-newline'
2238 based on `mode-require-final-newline'.
2239
2240 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
2241
2242 The elements in the syntactic context returned by `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2243 and stored in `c-syntactic-context' has been changed somewhat to allow
2244 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
2245 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
2246
2247 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
2248
2249 is now analyzed as
2250
2251 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
2252
2253 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
2254 symbol.
2255
2256 This change might affect code that calls `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2257 directly, and custom lineup functions if they use
2258 `c-syntactic-context'. However, the argument given to lineup
2259 functions is still a single cons cell with nil or an integer in the
2260 cdr.
2261
2262 *** API changes for derived modes.
2263
2264 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
2265 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
2266 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
2267 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
2268 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
2269
2270 **** New language variable system.
2271 These are variables whose values vary between CC Mode's different
2272 languages. See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
2273
2274 **** New initialization functions.
2275 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
2276 give better control: `c-basic-common-init', `c-font-lock-init', and
2277 `c-init-language-vars'.
2278
2279 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
2280 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
2281 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
2282 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
2283
2284 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
2285 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
2286 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
2287 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
2288 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2289
2290 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
2291 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
2292 its substatement. E.g:
2293
2294 if (x)
2295 x_is_true:
2296 do_stuff();
2297
2298 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
2299
2300 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
2301 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
2302 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
2303 variable `c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros'. A new syntactic symbol
2304 `cpp-define-intro' has been added to control the initial indentation
2305 inside `#define's.
2306
2307 **** New lineup function `c-lineup-cpp-define'.
2308
2309 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
2310 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
2311 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
2312 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
2313 much line `c-lineup-dont-change', which was used earlier, but handles
2314 empty lines within the macro better.
2315
2316 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
2317 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
2318 `c-context-line-break' and `c-context-open-line'.
2319
2320 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2321 `c-backslash-region' tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
2322 variable `c-backslash-max-column' puts a limit on how far out
2323 backslashes can be moved.
2324
2325 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2326 This is controlled by the new variable `c-auto-align-backslashes'. It
2327 affects `c-context-line-break', `c-context-open-line' and newlines
2328 inserted in Auto-Newline mode.
2329
2330 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
2331 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
2332 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
2333 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
2334 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
2335 backslash) in the macro.
2336
2337 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
2338 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
2339 the variable `c-indent-comment-alist'. The indentation behavior is
2340 based on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after
2341 #else and #endif but indentation to `comment-column' in most other
2342 cases (something which was hardcoded earlier).
2343
2344 *** New function `c-context-open-line'.
2345 It's the open-line equivalent of `c-context-line-break'.
2346
2347 *** New lineup functions
2348
2349 **** `c-lineup-string-cont'
2350 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
2351 continues. E.g:
2352
2353 result = prefix + "A message "
2354 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
2355
2356 **** `c-lineup-cascaded-calls'
2357 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
2358
2359 **** `c-lineup-knr-region-comment'
2360 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
2361 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
2362
2363 **** `c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg'
2364 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks.
2365
2366 **** `c-lineup-argcont'
2367 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
2368
2369 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
2370 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
2371 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
2372 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
2373 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
2374 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
2375
2376 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
2377 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
2378 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
2379 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
2380 context.
2381
2382 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
2383 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
2384 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
2385 happen when macros are involved.
2386
2387 *** Improved the way `c-indent-exp' chooses the block to indent.
2388 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
2389 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
2390 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
2391 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
2392 line is left untouched.
2393
2394 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
2395 The function `c-toggle-syntactic-indentation' can be used to toggle
2396 syntactic indentation.
2397
2398 ** In sh-script, a continuation line is only indented if the backslash was
2399 preceded by a SPC or a TAB.
2400
2401 ---
2402 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
2403
2404 ---
2405 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed
2406 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate
2407 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as
2408 C-c C-i b, and so on.
2409
2410 ** Fortran mode changes:
2411
2412 ---
2413 *** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
2414 highlighting for the old default.
2415
2416 +++
2417 *** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
2418 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
2419 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
2420
2421 +++
2422 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
2423 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
2424 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
2425 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
2426
2427 ---
2428 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for `hs-minor-mode' (hideshow).
2429 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
2430 majority.
2431
2432 ---
2433 *** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
2434 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
2435
2436 ---
2437 ** Reftex mode changes
2438
2439 +++
2440 *** Changes to RefTeX's table of contents
2441
2442 The new command keys "<" and ">" in the TOC buffer promote/demote the
2443 section at point or all sections in the current region, with full
2444 support for multifile documents.
2445
2446 The new command `reftex-toc-recenter' (`C-c -') shows the current
2447 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window.
2448 Recentering can happen automatically in idle time when the option
2449 `reftex-auto-recenter-toc' is turned on. The highlight in the TOC
2450 buffer stays when the focus moves to a different window. A dedicated
2451 frame can show the TOC with the current section always automatically
2452 highlighted. The frame is created and deleted from the toc buffer
2453 with the `d' key.
2454
2455 The toc window can be split off horizontally instead of vertically.
2456 See new option `reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally'.
2457
2458 Labels can be renamed globally from the table of contents using the
2459 key `M-%'.
2460
2461 The new command `reftex-goto-label' jumps directly to a label
2462 location.
2463
2464 +++
2465 *** Changes related to citations and BibTeX database files
2466
2467 Commands that insert a citation now prompt for optional arguments when
2468 called with a prefix argument. Related new options are
2469 `reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args' and `reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args'.
2470
2471 The new command `reftex-create-bibtex-file' creates a BibTeX database
2472 with all entries referenced in the current document. The keys "e" and
2473 "E" allow to produce a BibTeX database file from entries marked in a
2474 citation selection buffer.
2475
2476 The command `reftex-citation' uses the word in the buffer before the
2477 cursor as a default search string.
2478
2479 The support for chapterbib has been improved. Different chapters can
2480 now use BibTeX or an explicit `thebibliography' environment.
2481
2482 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography)
2483 can be configured with the new option `reftex-bibliography-commands'.
2484
2485 Support for jurabib has been added.
2486
2487 +++
2488 *** Global index matched may be verified with a user function
2489
2490 During global indexing, a user function can verify an index match.
2491 See new option `reftex-index-verify-function'.
2492
2493 +++
2494 *** Parsing documents with many labels can be sped up.
2495
2496 Operating in a document with thousands of labels can be sped up
2497 considerably by allowing RefTeX to derive the type of a label directly
2498 from the label prefix like `eq:' or `fig:'. The option
2499 `reftex-trust-label-prefix' needs to be configured in order to enable
2500 this feature. While the speed-up is significant, this may reduce the
2501 quality of the context offered by RefTeX to describe a label.
2502
2503 +++
2504 *** Miscellaneous changes
2505
2506 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can be
2507 configured in the new option `reftex-include-file-commands'.
2508
2509 RefTeX supports global incremental search.
2510
2511 +++
2512 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
2513 to support use of font-lock.
2514
2515 ** HTML/SGML changes:
2516
2517 ---
2518 *** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
2519 automatically.
2520
2521 +++
2522 *** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
2523 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
2524 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
2525 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
2526 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
2527 from the file name or buffer contents.
2528
2529 +++
2530 *** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
2531
2532 ** TeX modes:
2533
2534 +++
2535 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
2536
2537 +++
2538 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
2539 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
2540 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
2541 TeX commands to use at startup.
2542
2543 ---
2544 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
2545 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
2546
2547 +++
2548 *** New major mode Doctex mode, for *.dtx files.
2549
2550 ** BibTeX mode:
2551
2552 *** The new command `bibtex-url' browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
2553 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
2554
2555 *** The new command `bibtex-entry-update' (bound to C-c C-u) updates
2556 an existing BibTeX entry by inserting fields that may occur but are not
2557 present.
2558
2559 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
2560
2561 *** `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' can take values `plain',
2562 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
2563 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
2564 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
2565 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
2566 `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' is non-nil.
2567
2568 *** If the new variable `bibtex-parse-keys-fast' is non-nil,
2569 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
2570
2571 *** If the new variable `bibtex-autoadd-commas' is non-nil,
2572 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
2573
2574 *** The new variable `bibtex-autofill-types' contains a list of entry
2575 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
2576
2577 *** The new command `bibtex-complete' completes word fragment before
2578 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
2579
2580 *** The new commands `bibtex-find-entry' and `bibtex-find-crossref'
2581 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
2582 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
2583
2584 *** In BibTeX mode the command `fill-paragraph' (M-q) fills
2585 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
2586
2587 *** The new variables `bibtex-files' and `bibtex-file-path' define a set
2588 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
2589
2590 *** The new command `bibtex-validate-globally' checks for duplicate keys
2591 in multiple BibTeX files.
2592
2593 *** The new command `bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill' pushes summary
2594 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
2595
2596 *** The new variables bibtex-expand-strings and
2597 bibtex-autokey-expand-strings control the expansion of strings when
2598 extracting the content of a BibTeX field.
2599
2600 +++
2601 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now
2602 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l'
2603 and `C-c C-r'.
2604
2605 ** GUD changes:
2606
2607 +++
2608 *** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
2609 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
2610
2611 ---
2612 *** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
2613 and other common debugger commands.
2614
2615 +++
2616 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
2617 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
2618 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
2619 state of your program. It can separate the input/output of your program from
2620 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
2621 Emacs 21/22 such as the toolbar, and bitmaps in the fringe to indicate
2622 breakpoints.
2623
2624 Use M-x gdb to start GDB-UI.
2625
2626 *** The variable tooltip-gud-tips-p has been removed. GUD tooltips can now be
2627 toggled independently of normal tooltips with the minor mode
2628 `gud-tooltip-mode'.
2629
2630 +++
2631 *** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to
2632 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is
2633 not executing.
2634
2635 ---
2636 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
2637
2638 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class information.
2639 Fast startup since there is no need to scan all source files up front.
2640 There is also no need to create and maintain lists of source
2641 directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' and
2642 `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
2643
2644 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
2645 set/clear operations from Java source files under the classpath, stack
2646 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
2647 (gud-finish).
2648
2649 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
2650 (Java 1.1 jdb).
2651
2652 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
2653 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
2654 Set `gud-jdb-use-classpath' to nil.
2655
2656 *** Added Customization Variables
2657
2658 **** `gud-jdb-command-name'. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
2659
2660 **** `gud-jdb-use-classpath'. Allows selection of java source file searching
2661 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan `gud-jdb-directories' for
2662 java sources (previous method).
2663
2664 **** `gud-jdb-directories'. List of directories to scan and search for Java
2665 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
2666 is nil).
2667
2668 *** Minor Improvements
2669
2670 **** The STARTTLS wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
2671 instead of the OpenSSL based `starttls' tool. For backwards
2672 compatibility, it prefers `starttls', but you can toggle
2673 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
2674 `starttls' tool).
2675
2676 **** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
2677
2678 ** Auto-Revert changes:
2679
2680 +++
2681 *** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file.
2682
2683 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert
2684 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is
2685 displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it stays at
2686 the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file:
2687 just put point at the end of the buffer and it stays there. This
2688 rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior can
2689 be mode dependent.
2690
2691 If you are sure that the file will only change by growing at the end,
2692 then you can tail the file more efficiently by using the new minor
2693 mode Auto Revert Tail mode. The function `auto-revert-tail-mode'
2694 toggles this mode.
2695
2696 +++
2697 *** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and
2698 other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to
2699 revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled
2700 and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert
2701 mode only reverts a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil
2702 `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which
2703 decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means
2704 that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not
2705 work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu.
2706
2707 +++
2708 *** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto
2709 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version
2710 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in
2711 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info
2712 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted.
2713
2714 ---
2715 ** recentf changes.
2716
2717 The recent file list is now automatically cleaned up when recentf mode is
2718 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
2719 automatic cleanup.
2720
2721 The ten most recent files can be quickly opened by using the shortcut
2722 keys 1 to 9, and 0, when the recent list is displayed in a buffer via
2723 the `recentf-open-files', or `recentf-open-more-files' commands.
2724
2725 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
2726 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
2727 keep in the recent list.
2728
2729 With the more advanced option `recentf-filename-handlers', you can
2730 specify functions that successively transform recent file names. For
2731 example, if set to `file-truename' plus `abbreviate-file-name', the
2732 same file will not be in the recent list with different symbolic
2733 links, and the file name will be abbreviated.
2734
2735 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
2736 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
2737 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
2738
2739 +++
2740 ** Desktop package
2741
2742 +++
2743 *** Desktop saving is now a minor mode, `desktop-save-mode'.
2744
2745 +++
2746 *** The variable `desktop-enable' is obsolete.
2747
2748 Customize `desktop-save-mode' to enable desktop saving.
2749
2750 ---
2751 *** Buffers are saved in the desktop file in the same order as that in the
2752 buffer list.
2753
2754 +++
2755 *** The desktop package can be customized to restore only some buffers
2756 immediately, remaining buffers are restored lazily (when Emacs is
2757 idle).
2758
2759 +++
2760 *** New commands:
2761 - desktop-revert reverts to the last loaded desktop.
2762 - desktop-change-dir kills current desktop and loads a new.
2763 - desktop-save-in-desktop-dir saves desktop in the directory from which
2764 it was loaded.
2765 - desktop-lazy-complete runs the desktop load to completion.
2766 - desktop-lazy-abort aborts lazy loading of the desktop.
2767
2768 ---
2769 *** New customizable variables:
2770 - desktop-save. Determins whether the desktop should be saved when it is
2771 killed.
2772 - desktop-file-name-format. Format in which desktop file names should be saved.
2773 - desktop-path. List of directories in which to lookup the desktop file.
2774 - desktop-locals-to-save. List of local variables to save.
2775 - desktop-globals-to-clear. List of global variables that `desktop-clear' will clear.
2776 - desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp. Regexp identifying buffers that `desktop-clear'
2777 should not delete.
2778 - desktop-restore-eager. Number of buffers to restore immediately. Remaining buffers are
2779 restored lazily (when Emacs is idle).
2780 - desktop-lazy-verbose. Verbose reporting of lazily created buffers.
2781 - desktop-lazy-idle-delay. Idle delay before starting to create buffers.
2782
2783 +++
2784 *** New command line option --no-desktop
2785
2786 ---
2787 *** New hooks:
2788 - desktop-after-read-hook run after a desktop is loaded.
2789 - desktop-no-desktop-file-hook run when no desktop file is found.
2790
2791 ---
2792 ** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files.
2793
2794 When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer
2795 include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist.
2796 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil
2797 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped'
2798 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this
2799 feature.
2800
2801 ** EDiff changes.
2802
2803 +++
2804 *** When comparing directories.
2805 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
2806 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
2807 from one directory to another.
2808
2809 +++
2810 *** When comparing files or buffers.
2811 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
2812 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
2813 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
2814 comparison.
2815
2816 +++
2817 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
2818 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
2819 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
2820
2821 +++
2822 ** Etags changes.
2823
2824 *** New regular expressions features
2825
2826 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
2827
2828 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
2829 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
2830 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
2831 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
2832 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
2833 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
2834 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
2835 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
2836 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
2837 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
2838
2839 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in GCC.
2840
2841 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
2842 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
2843 CR, TAB, VT.
2844
2845 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
2846
2847 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
2848 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
2849 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
2850
2851 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
2852
2853 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
2854 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
2855
2856 *** New language parsing features
2857
2858 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
2859
2860 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
2861
2862 **** The GCC __attribute__ keyword is now recognized and ignored.
2863
2864 **** New language HTML.
2865
2866 Tags are generated for `title' as well as `h1', `h2', and `h3'. Also,
2867 when `name=' is used inside an anchor and whenever `id=' is used.
2868
2869 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
2870
2871 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
2872 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
2873
2874 **** New language Lua.
2875
2876 All functions are tagged.
2877
2878 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
2879
2880 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
2881 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
2882 package::sub.
2883
2884 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
2885
2886 **** New language PHP.
2887
2888 Functions, classes and defines are tags. If the --members option is
2889 specified to etags, variables are tags also.
2890
2891 **** New default keywords for TeX.
2892
2893 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
2894 renewenvironment.
2895
2896 *** Honour #line directives.
2897
2898 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
2899 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
2900 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
2901 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
2902 writes tags pointing to the source file.
2903
2904 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
2905
2906 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
2907 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
2908 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
2909 the file FILE.
2910
2911 ** VC Changes
2912
2913 +++
2914 *** The key C-x C-q only changes the read-only state of the buffer
2915 (toggle-read-only). It no longer checks files in or out.
2916
2917 We made this change because we held a poll and found that many users
2918 were unhappy with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this
2919 behavior, you can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your
2920 `.emacs' file:
2921
2922 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
2923
2924 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
2925
2926 +++
2927 *** The new variable `vc-cvs-global-switches' specifies switches that
2928 are passed to any CVS command invoked by VC.
2929
2930 These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which means they
2931 are inserted before the command name. For example, this allows you to
2932 specify a compression level using the `-z#' option for CVS.
2933
2934 +++
2935 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
2936
2937 +++
2938 *** VC-Annotate mode enhancements
2939
2940 In VC-Annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2941 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2942 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2943
2944 P: annotates the previous revision
2945 N: annotates the next revision
2946 J: annotates the revision at line
2947 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2948 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2949 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2950 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
2951
2952 ** pcl-cvs changes:
2953
2954 +++
2955 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
2956 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
2957 in the repository.
2958
2959 +++
2960 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
2961 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
2962 `checkout', `update' or `commit'. That means using cvs diff options
2963 -rBASE -rHEAD.
2964
2965 +++
2966 ** The new variable `mail-default-directory' specifies
2967 `default-directory' for mail buffers. This directory is used for
2968 auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to "~/".
2969
2970 +++
2971 ** The mode line can indicate new mail in a directory or file.
2972
2973 See the documentation of the user option
2974 `display-time-mail-directory'.
2975
2976 ** Rmail changes:
2977
2978 ---
2979 *** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
2980
2981 *** The new commands rmail-end-of-message and rmail-summary end-of-message,
2982 by default bound to `/', go to the end of the current mail message in
2983 Rmail and Rmail summary buffers.
2984
2985 +++
2986 *** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
2987
2988 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
2989 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
2990 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
2991 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
2992 used instead of the native one.
2993
2994 ** Gnus package
2995
2996 ---
2997 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
2998
2999 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
3000 PGP/MIME.
3001
3002 ---
3003 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
3004
3005 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
3006
3007 ---
3008 ** MH-E changes.
3009
3010 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.93. There have been major changes since
3011 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
3012
3013 ** Calendar changes:
3014
3015 +++
3016 *** You can now use < and >, instead of C-x < and C-x >, to scroll
3017 the calendar left or right. (The old key bindings still work too.)
3018
3019 +++
3020 *** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
3021 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
3022
3023 +++
3024 *** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
3025 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
3026 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
3027 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
3028 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
3029 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
3030 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
3031 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
3032 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
3033
3034 +++
3035 *** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
3036 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
3037 count backward from the end of the year.
3038
3039 +++
3040 *** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
3041 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
3042 day of that ISO week.
3043
3044 ---
3045 *** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
3046 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
3047
3048 ---
3049 *** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
3050 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
3051 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
3052 `christian-holidays' simpler.
3053
3054 ---
3055 *** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
3056 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
3057 and `diary-header-line-format'.
3058
3059 +++
3060 *** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed:
3061 use the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
3062 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
3063 `appt-issue-message', `appt-visible', and `appt-msg-window'.
3064
3065 +++
3066 *** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
3067 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
3068 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
3069 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
3070 formats.
3071
3072 +++
3073 ** Speedbar changes:
3074
3075 *** Speedbar items can now be selected by clicking mouse-1, based on
3076 the `mouse-1-click-follows-link' mechanism.
3077
3078 *** SPC and DEL are no longer bound to scroll up/down in the speedbar
3079 keymap.
3080
3081 *** The new command `speedbar-toggle-line-expansion', bound to SPC,
3082 contracts or expands the line under the cursor.
3083
3084 *** New command `speedbar-create-directory', bound to `M'.
3085
3086 *** The new commands `speedbar-expand-line-descendants' and
3087 `speedbar-contract-line-descendants', bound to `[' and `]'
3088 respectively, expand and contract the line under cursor with all of
3089 its descendents.
3090
3091 *** The new user option `speedbar-query-confirmation-method' controls
3092 how querying is performed for file operations. A value of 'always
3093 means to always query before file operations; 'none-but-delete means
3094 to not query before any file operations, except before a file
3095 deletion.
3096
3097 *** The new user option `speedbar-select-frame-method' specifies how
3098 to select a frame for displaying a file opened with the speedbar. A
3099 value of 'attached means to use the attached frame (the frame that
3100 speedbar was started from.) A number such as 1 or -1 means to pass
3101 that number to `other-frame'.
3102
3103 *** The new user option `speedbar-use-tool-tips-flag', if non-nil,
3104 means to display tool-tips for speedbar items.
3105
3106 *** The frame management code in speedbar.el has been split into a new
3107 `dframe' library. Emacs Lisp code that makes use of the speedbar
3108 should use `dframe-attached-frame' instead of
3109 `speedbar-attached-frame', `dframe-timer' instead of `speedbar-timer',
3110 `dframe-close-frame' instead of `speedbar-close-frame', and
3111 `dframe-activity-change-focus-flag' instead of
3112 `speedbar-activity-change-focus-flag'. The variables
3113 `speedbar-update-speed' and `speedbar-navigating-speed' are also
3114 obsolete; use `dframe-update-speed' instead.
3115
3116 ---
3117 ** sql changes.
3118
3119 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different
3120 SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a
3121 buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current
3122 session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the
3123 SQL->Highlighting submenu.)
3124
3125 The following values are supported:
3126
3127 ansi ANSI Standard (default)
3128 db2 DB2
3129 informix Informix
3130 ingres Ingres
3131 interbase Interbase
3132 linter Linter
3133 ms Microsoft
3134 mysql MySQL
3135 oracle Oracle
3136 postgres Postgres
3137 solid Solid
3138 sqlite SQLite
3139 sybase Sybase
3140
3141 The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the
3142 SQL mode indicator.
3143
3144 The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in
3145 your `.emacs' will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use
3146 `sql-product' to accomplish this.
3147
3148 ANSI keywords are always highlighted.
3149
3150 *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add
3151 font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have
3152 all identifiers ending in `_t' under MS SQLServer treated as a type,
3153 you would use the following line in your .emacs file:
3154
3155 (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms
3156 '(("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face)))
3157
3158 *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i.
3159
3160 Most SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are
3161 highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'.
3162
3163 *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved.
3164
3165 Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented.
3166 sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because
3167 osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages
3168 are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is
3169 terminated.
3170
3171 If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is
3172 called with the `-E' command line argument to use the operating system
3173 credentials to authenticate the user.
3174
3175 *** Postgres support is enhanced.
3176 Keyword highlighting of Postgres 7.3 is implemented. Prompting for
3177 the username and the pgsql `-U' option is added.
3178
3179 *** MySQL support is enhanced.
3180 Keyword higlighting of MySql 4.0 is implemented.
3181
3182 *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes,
3183 packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and
3184 defaults.
3185
3186 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the
3187 appropriate `sql-interactive-mode' wrapper for the current setting of
3188 `sql-product'.
3189
3190 ---
3191 *** sql.el supports the SQLite interpreter--call 'sql-sqlite'.
3192
3193 ** FFAP changes:
3194
3195 +++
3196 *** New ffap commands and keybindings:
3197
3198 C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'),
3199 C-x C-v (`ffap-alternate-file'), C-x C-d (`ffap-list-directory'),
3200 C-x 4 r (`ffap-read-only-other-window'), C-x 4 d (`ffap-dired-other-window'),
3201 C-x 5 r (`ffap-read-only-other-frame'), C-x 5 d (`ffap-dired-other-frame').
3202
3203 ---
3204 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default.
3205
3206 C-x C-f passes the file name to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS
3207 argument, which visits multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'.
3208
3209 ---
3210 ** In skeleton.el, `-' marks the `skeleton-point' without interregion interaction.
3211
3212 `@' has reverted to only setting `skeleton-positions' and no longer
3213 sets `skeleton-point'. Skeletons which used @ to mark
3214 `skeleton-point' independent of `_' should now use `-' instead. The
3215 updated `skeleton-insert' docstring explains these new features along
3216 with other details of skeleton construction.
3217
3218 ---
3219 ** Hideshow mode changes
3220
3221 *** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay
3222 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch
3223 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during
3224 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation.
3225
3226 *** New variable `hs-allow-nesting' non-nil means that hiding a block does
3227 not discard the hidden state of any "internal" blocks; when the parent
3228 block is later shown, the internal blocks remain hidden. Default is nil.
3229
3230 +++
3231 ** `hide-ifdef-mode' now uses overlays rather than selective-display
3232 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
3233 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
3234
3235 ---
3236 ** `partial-completion-mode' now handles partial completion on directory names.
3237
3238 ---
3239 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil
3240 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if
3241 you don't want the `.type-break' file in your home directory or are
3242 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs.
3243
3244 ---
3245 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
3246
3247 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
3248 `ps-print', provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF
3249 fonts. See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
3250
3251 ---
3252 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
3253 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
3254 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
3255 using strokes as an input method.
3256
3257 ** Emacs server changes:
3258
3259 +++
3260 *** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine.
3261
3262 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start &
3263 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start &
3264 % emacsclient -s foo file1
3265 % emacsclient -s bar file2
3266
3267 +++
3268 *** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
3269 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given Lisp
3270 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
3271
3272 +++
3273 *** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
3274
3275 ---
3276 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
3277
3278 +++
3279 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
3280
3281 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
3282 argument it toggles the mode. Turning off PC-Selection mode restores
3283 the global key bindings that were replaced by turning on the mode.
3284
3285 ---
3286 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
3287 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
3288
3289 ---
3290 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
3291
3292 Emacs still works on terminals that require magic cookies in order to
3293 use standout mode, but they can no longer display mode-lines in
3294 inverse-video.
3295
3296 ---
3297 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
3298
3299 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
3300 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
3301 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
3302
3303 ** battery.el changes:
3304
3305 ---
3306 *** display-battery-mode replaces display-battery.
3307
3308 ---
3309 *** battery.el now works on recent versions of OS X.
3310
3311 ---
3312 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode.
3313
3314 To enable this, set `calculator-output-radix' non-nil. In this mode a
3315 separator character is used every few digits, making it easier to see
3316 byte boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the
3317 variable `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'.
3318
3319 ---
3320 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead.
3321
3322 ---
3323 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead.
3324
3325 ---
3326 ** cplus-md.el has been deleted.
3327 \f
3328 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 on non-free operating systems
3329
3330 +++
3331 ** The HOME directory defaults to Application Data under the user profile.
3332
3333 If you used a previous version of Emacs without setting the HOME
3334 environment variable and a `.emacs' was saved, then Emacs will continue
3335 using C:/ as the default HOME. But if you are installing Emacs afresh,
3336 the default location will be the "Application Data" (or similar
3337 localized name) subdirectory of your user profile. A typical location
3338 of this directory is "C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data",
3339 where USERNAME is your user name.
3340
3341 This change means that users can now have their own `.emacs' files on
3342 shared computers, and the default HOME directory is less likely to be
3343 read-only on computers that are administered by someone else.
3344
3345 +++
3346 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
3347
3348 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
3349 existing values. For example:
3350
3351 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
3352
3353 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
3354 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
3355
3356 ---
3357 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
3358
3359 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
3360 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
3361
3362 ---
3363 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
3364
3365 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
3366
3367 ---
3368 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
3369
3370 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
3371 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
3372 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
3373 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
3374 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
3375 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
3376
3377 ---
3378 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
3379
3380 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
3381 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
3382 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
3383 sound support for those formats.
3384
3385 ---
3386 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
3387
3388 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
3389
3390 ---
3391 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
3392
3393 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
3394 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
3395 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
3396
3397 ---
3398 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
3399
3400 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
3401 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
3402 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
3403 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
3404 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
3405 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
3406 you wish to use them in other faces.
3407
3408 ---
3409 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
3410
3411 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
3412 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
3413 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
3414 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
3415 any customizations.
3416
3417 ---
3418 ** Running in a console window in Windows now uses the console size.
3419
3420 Previous versions of Emacs erred on the side of having a usable Emacs
3421 through telnet, even though that was inconvenient if you use Emacs in
3422 a local console window with a scrollback buffer. The default value of
3423 w32-use-full-screen-buffer is now nil, which favours local console
3424 windows. Recent versions of Windows telnet also work well with this
3425 setting. If you are using an older telnet server then Emacs detects
3426 that the console window dimensions that are reported are not sane, and
3427 defaults to 80x25. If you use such a telnet server regularly at a size
3428 other than 80x25, you can still manually set
3429 w32-use-full-screen-buffer to t.
3430
3431 ---
3432 ** On Mac OS, `keyboard-coding-system' changes based on the keyboard script.
3433
3434 ---
3435 ** The variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants
3436 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and
3437 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete.
3438
3439 ** The variable `mac-command-key-is-meta' is obsolete. Use
3440 `mac-command-modifier' and `mac-option-modifier' instead.
3441 \f
3442 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3443
3444 ---
3445 ** The variables post-command-idle-hook and post-command-idle-delay have
3446 been removed. Use run-with-idle-timer instead.
3447
3448 +++
3449 ** `suppress-keymap' now works by remapping `self-insert-command' to
3450 the command `undefined'. (In earlier Emacs versions, it used
3451 `substitute-key-definition' to rebind self inserting characters to
3452 `undefined'.)
3453
3454 +++
3455 ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the
3456 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose
3457 `risky-local-variable' property is nil.
3458
3459 ---
3460 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
3461
3462 +++
3463 ** The variable `memory-full' now remains t until
3464 there is no longer a shortage of memory.
3465 \f
3466 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3467
3468 ** General Lisp changes:
3469
3470 *** The function `expt' handles negative exponents differently.
3471 The value for `(expt A B)', if both A and B are integers and B is
3472 negative, is now a float. For example: (expt 2 -2) => 0.25.
3473
3474 +++
3475 *** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3476
3477 +++
3478 *** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
3479
3480 +++
3481 *** `add-to-list' takes an optional third argument, APPEND.
3482
3483 If APPEND is non-nil, the new element gets added at the end of the
3484 list instead of at the beginning. This change actually occurred in
3485 Emacs 21.1, but was not documented then.
3486
3487 +++
3488 *** New function `add-to-ordered-list' is like `add-to-list' but
3489 associates a numeric ordering of each element added to the list.
3490
3491 +++
3492 *** New function `copy-tree' makes a copy of a tree.
3493
3494 It recursively copies through both CARs and CDRs.
3495
3496 +++
3497 *** New function `delete-dups' deletes `equal' duplicate elements from a list.
3498
3499 It modifies the list destructively, like `delete'. Of several `equal'
3500 occurrences of an element in the list, the one that's kept is the
3501 first one.
3502
3503 +++
3504 *** New function `rassq-delete-all'.
3505
3506 (rassq-delete-all VALUE ALIST) deletes, from ALIST, each element whose
3507 CDR is `eq' to the specified value.
3508
3509 +++
3510 *** The function `number-sequence' makes a list of equally-separated numbers.
3511
3512 For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). By
3513 default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different
3514 separation as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns
3515 (1.5 3.5 5.5).
3516
3517 +++
3518 *** New variables `most-positive-fixnum' and `most-negative-fixnum'.
3519
3520 They hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
3521
3522 +++
3523 *** Minor change in the function `format'.
3524
3525 Some flags that were accepted but not implemented (such as "*") are no
3526 longer accepted.
3527
3528 +++
3529 *** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer give errors for bad plists.
3530
3531 They return nil for a malformed property list or if the list is
3532 cyclic.
3533
3534 +++
3535 *** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
3536
3537 They are like `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare
3538 the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
3539
3540 +++
3541 *** New variable `print-continuous-numbering'.
3542
3543 When this is non-nil, successive calls to print functions use a single
3544 numbering scheme for circular structure references. This is only
3545 relevant when `print-circle' is non-nil.
3546
3547 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
3548 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
3549
3550 +++
3551 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
3552
3553 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
3554 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
3555 if no expansion is done, which can be tested using `eq'.
3556
3557 +++
3558 *** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
3559
3560 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
3561 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
3562 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
3563
3564 +++
3565 *** A function or macro's doc string can now specify the calling pattern.
3566
3567 You put this info in the doc string's last line. It should be
3568 formatted so as to match the regexp "\n\n(fn .*)\\'". If you don't
3569 specify this explicitly, Emacs determines it from the actual argument
3570 names. Usually that default is right, but not always.
3571
3572 +++
3573 *** New macro `with-local-quit' temporarily allows quitting.
3574
3575 A quit inside the body of `with-local-quit' is caught by the
3576 `with-local-quit' form itself, but another quit will happen later once
3577 the code that has inhibitted quitting exits.
3578
3579 This is for use around potentially blocking or long-running code
3580 inside timer functions and `post-command-hook' functions.
3581
3582 +++
3583 *** New macro `define-obsolete-function-alias'.
3584
3585 This combines `defalias' and `make-obsolete'.
3586
3587 +++
3588 *** New function `unsafep' determines whether a Lisp form is safe.
3589
3590 It returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly do anything
3591 dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be unsafe
3592 (calls unknown function, alters global variable, etc.).
3593
3594 +++
3595 *** New macro `eval-at-startup' specifies expressions to
3596 evaluate when Emacs starts up. If this is done after startup,
3597 it evaluates those expressions immediately.
3598
3599 This is useful in packages that can be preloaded.
3600
3601 *** `list-faces-display' takes an optional argument, REGEXP.
3602
3603 If it is non-nil, the function lists only faces matching this regexp.
3604
3605 ** Lisp code indentation features:
3606
3607 +++
3608 *** The `defmacro' form can contain indentation and edebug declarations.
3609
3610 These declarations specify how to indent the macro calls in Lisp mode
3611 and how to debug them with Edebug. You write them like this:
3612
3613 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
3614
3615 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
3616 possible declaration specifiers are:
3617
3618 (indent INDENT)
3619 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
3620
3621 (edebug DEBUG)
3622 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
3623 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro,
3624 but this is cleaner.)
3625
3626 ---
3627 *** cl-indent now allows customization of Indentation of backquoted forms.
3628
3629 See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
3630
3631 ---
3632 *** cl-indent now handles indentation of simple and extended `loop' forms.
3633
3634 The new user options `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation',
3635 `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can
3636 be used to customize the indentation of keywords and forms in loop
3637 forms.
3638
3639 +++
3640 ** Variable aliases:
3641
3642 *** New function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
3643
3644 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
3645 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
3646 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
3647 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
3648
3649 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
3650 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
3651
3652 *** New function: indirect-variable VARIABLE
3653
3654 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
3655 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
3656 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
3657
3658 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
3659 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
3660
3661 +++
3662 *** The macro `define-obsolete-variable-alias' combines `defvaralias' and
3663 `make-obsolete-variable'.
3664
3665 ** defcustom changes:
3666
3667 +++
3668 *** The new customization type `float' requires a floating point number.
3669
3670 ** String changes:
3671
3672 +++
3673 *** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character.
3674
3675 Exception: In a character constant, if it is followed by a `-' in a
3676 character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), it is still interpreted as the super
3677 modifier. In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space.
3678
3679 +++
3680 *** A hex escape in a string constant forces the string to be multibyte.
3681
3682 +++
3683 *** An octal escape in a string constant forces the string to be unibyte.
3684
3685 +++
3686 *** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3687 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3688 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3689 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3690 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3691
3692 +++
3693 *** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3694 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3695
3696 +++
3697 *** New function `substring-no-properties' returns a substring without
3698 text properties.
3699
3700 +++
3701 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
3702 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
3703 been declared obsolete.
3704
3705 +++
3706 ** Displaying warnings to the user.
3707
3708 See the functions `warn' and `display-warning', or the Lisp Manual.
3709 If you want to be sure the warning will not be overlooked, this
3710 facility is much better than using `message', since it displays
3711 warnings in a separate window.
3712
3713 +++
3714 ** Progress reporters.
3715
3716 These provide a simple and uniform way for commands to present
3717 progress messages for the user.
3718
3719 See the new functions `make-progress-reporter',
3720 `progress-reporter-update', `progress-reporter-force-update',
3721 `progress-reporter-done', and `dotimes-with-progress-reporter'.
3722
3723 ** Buffer positions:
3724
3725 +++
3726 *** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
3727 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
3728 the usable window height and width is used.
3729
3730 +++
3731 *** The `line-move', `scroll-up', and `scroll-down' functions will now
3732 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
3733 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presence of
3734 large images. To disable this feature, bind the new variable
3735 `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
3736
3737 +++
3738 *** The argument to `forward-word', `backward-word' is optional.
3739
3740 It defaults to 1.
3741
3742 +++
3743 *** Argument to `forward-to-indentation' and `backward-to-indentation' is optional.
3744
3745 It defaults to 1.
3746
3747 +++
3748 *** New function `mouse-on-link-p' tests if a position is in a clickable link.
3749
3750 This is the function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link'
3751 functionality.
3752
3753 +++
3754 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of a position.
3755
3756 It an optional buffer position argument that defaults to point.
3757
3758 +++
3759 *** `field-beginning' and `field-end' take new optional argument, LIMIT.
3760
3761 This argument tells them not to search beyond LIMIT. Instead they
3762 give up and return LIMIT.
3763
3764 +++
3765 *** Function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now returns the pixel coordinates
3766 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3767 arg is non-nil.
3768
3769 +++
3770 *** New functions `posn-at-point' and `posn-at-x-y' return
3771 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
3772 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
3773
3774 ** Text modification:
3775
3776 +++
3777 *** The new function `insert-for-yank' normally works like `insert', but
3778 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list
3779 and handles the `yank-handler' text property.
3780
3781 +++
3782 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-as-yank' is like
3783 `insert-for-yank' except that it gets the text from another buffer as
3784 in `insert-buffer-substring'.
3785
3786 +++
3787 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-no-properties' is like
3788 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes all text properties from the
3789 inserted substring.
3790
3791 +++
3792 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer
3793 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns
3794 the filtered substring. Use it instead of `buffer-substring' or
3795 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible
3796 data structure, such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register.
3797
3798 The list of filter function is specified by the new variable
3799 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode adds to
3800 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied
3801 text.
3802
3803 +++
3804 *** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
3805 argument.
3806
3807 +++
3808 *** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
3809 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
3810 be inserted is translated through it.
3811
3812 ---
3813 *** Text clones.
3814
3815 The new function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
3816 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
3817 clone to the other.
3818
3819 ---
3820 *** The function `insert-string' is now obsolete.
3821
3822 ** Filling changes.
3823
3824 +++
3825 *** In determining an adaptive fill prefix, Emacs now tries the function in
3826 `adaptive-fill-function' _before_ matching the buffer line against
3827 `adaptive-fill-regexp' rather than _after_ it.
3828
3829 +++
3830 ** Atomic change groups.
3831
3832 To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that
3833 they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group'
3834 around the code that makes changes. For instance:
3835
3836 (atomic-change-group
3837 (insert foo)
3838 (delete-region x y))
3839
3840 If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
3841 `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that
3842 were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect
3843 on any other buffers--any such changes remain.
3844
3845 If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the
3846 lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how.
3847
3848 To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'.
3849 Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer.
3850 This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save
3851 the handle to activate the change group and then finish it.
3852
3853 Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change
3854 group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to
3855 do this.
3856
3857 After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can
3858 either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call
3859 `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final;
3860 call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all.
3861
3862 You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always
3863 finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the
3864 `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs.
3865 (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and
3866 `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the
3867 group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group
3868 twice.
3869
3870 To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once
3871 for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the
3872 returned values, like this:
3873
3874 (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1)
3875 (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
3876
3877 You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
3878 to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to
3879 `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'.
3880
3881 Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you
3882 would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer
3883 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
3884 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
3885 finished.
3886
3887 ** Buffer-related changes:
3888
3889 ---
3890 *** `list-buffers-noselect' now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
3891
3892 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
3893
3894 +++
3895 *** `kill-buffer-hook' is now a permanent local.
3896
3897 +++
3898 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local
3899 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not
3900 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default
3901 value of VARIABLE instead.
3902
3903 *** The function `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' now lets you maintain
3904 various status records in parallel.
3905
3906 It takes a variable (a symbol) as argument. If the variable is non-nil,
3907 then its value should be a vector installed previously by
3908 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p'. If the frame names, buffer names, buffer
3909 order, or their read-only or modified flags have changed, since the
3910 time the vector's contents were recorded by a previous call to
3911 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', then the function returns t. Otherwise
3912 it returns nil.
3913
3914 On the first call to `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', the variable's
3915 value should be nil. `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' stores a suitable
3916 vector into the variable and returns t.
3917
3918 If the variable is itself nil, then `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' uses,
3919 for compatibility, an internal variable which exists only for this
3920 purpose.
3921
3922 +++
3923 *** The function `read-buffer' follows the convention for reading from
3924 the minibuffer with a default value: if DEF is non-nil, the minibuffer
3925 prompt provided in PROMPT is edited to show the default value provided
3926 in DEF before the terminal colon and space.
3927
3928 ** Local variables lists:
3929
3930 +++
3931 *** Text properties in local variables.
3932
3933 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
3934 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
3935
3936 +++
3937 *** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
3938 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
3939 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
3940 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
3941 needed.
3942
3943 ---
3944 *** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
3945 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
3946 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
3947 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
3948 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
3949 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
3950
3951 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
3952 confirmation as before.
3953
3954 ** Searching and matching changes:
3955
3956 +++
3957 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches
3958 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far
3959 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long.
3960
3961 +++
3962 *** The new variable `search-spaces-regexp' controls how to search
3963 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
3964 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
3965 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
3966
3967 Spaces inside of constructs such as `[..]' and inside loops such as
3968 `*', `+', and `?' are never replaced with `search-spaces-regexp'.
3969
3970 +++
3971 *** New regular expression operators, `\_<' and `\_>'.
3972
3973 These match the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
3974 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
3975 specified by the syntax table.
3976
3977 ---
3978 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
3979
3980 +++
3981 *** `skip-chars-forward' and `skip-chars-backward' now handle
3982 character classes such as `[:alpha:]', along with individual
3983 characters and ranges.
3984
3985 ---
3986 *** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
3987 properties from surrounding text.
3988
3989 +++
3990 *** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
3991 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
3992 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
3993
3994 +++
3995 *** Functions `match-data' and `set-match-data' now have an optional
3996 argument `reseat'. When non-nil, all markers in the match data list
3997 passed to these functions will be reseated to point to nowhere.
3998
3999 +++
4000 *** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
4001 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters
4002 that end a sentence without following spaces.
4003
4004 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the
4005 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then
4006 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
4007 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
4008 `sentence-end-without-space'.
4009
4010 ** Undo changes:
4011
4012 +++
4013 *** `buffer-undo-list' can allows programmable elements.
4014
4015 These elements have the form (apply FUNNAME . ARGS), where FUNNAME is
4016 a symbol other than t or nil. That stands for a high-level change
4017 that should be undone by evaluating (apply FUNNAME ARGS).
4018
4019 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
4020 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
4021 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
4022
4023 +++
4024 *** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
4025 `undo-outer-limit', garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
4026 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
4027
4028 +++
4029 ** New `yank-handler' text property can be used to control how
4030 previously killed text on the kill ring is reinserted.
4031
4032 The value of the `yank-handler' property must be a list with one to four
4033 elements with the following format:
4034 (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO).
4035
4036 The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on
4037 the first character on its string argument (typically the first
4038 element on the kill-ring). If a `yank-handler' property is found,
4039 the normal behavior of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways:
4040
4041 When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert'
4042 to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert.
4043 If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object
4044 passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is
4045 `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a
4046 rectangle.
4047 If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the
4048 `yank-excluded-properties' is not performed; instead FUNCTION is
4049 responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary
4050 if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object.
4051 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called
4052 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is
4053 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region.
4054 FUNCTION can set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value.
4055
4056 *** The functions `kill-new', `kill-append', and `kill-region' now have an
4057 optional argument to specify the `yank-handler' text property to put on
4058 the killed text.
4059
4060 *** The function `yank-pop' will now use a non-nil value of the variable
4061 `yank-undo-function' (instead of `delete-region') to undo the previous
4062 `yank' or `yank-pop' command (or a call to `insert-for-yank'). The function
4063 `insert-for-yank' automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO
4064 element of the string argument's `yank-handler' text property if present.
4065
4066 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the
4067 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the
4068 string. The old behavior is available if you call
4069 `insert-for-yank-1' instead.
4070
4071 ** Syntax table changes:
4072
4073 +++
4074 *** The macro `with-syntax-table' no longer copies the syntax table.
4075
4076 +++
4077 *** The new function `syntax-after' returns the syntax code
4078 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
4079 of text properties as well as the character code.
4080
4081 +++
4082 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
4083 by `syntax-after').
4084
4085 +++
4086 *** The new function `syntax-ppss' rovides an efficient way to find the
4087 current syntactic context at point.
4088
4089 ** File operation changes:
4090
4091 +++
4092 *** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
4093 searching for an executable or an Emacs Lisp file.
4094
4095 +++
4096 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
4097 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
4098 operation.
4099
4100 +++
4101 *** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
4102 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
4103 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
4104 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system.
4105
4106 +++
4107 *** `buffer-auto-save-file-format' is the new name for what was
4108 formerly called `auto-save-file-format'. It is now a permanent local.
4109
4110 +++
4111 *** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
4112 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
4113 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
4114
4115 +++
4116 *** `copy-file' now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
4117
4118 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
4119
4120 +++
4121 *** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
4122 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
4123
4124 +++
4125 *** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which
4126 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that
4127 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link,
4128 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway.
4129
4130 +++
4131 *** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer'
4132 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final
4133 tasks. For example, it can be used by the copyright package to make
4134 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers.
4135
4136 +++
4137 *** If `buffer-save-without-query' is non-nil in some buffer,
4138 `save-some-buffers' will always save that buffer without asking (if
4139 it's modified).
4140
4141 +++
4142 *** New function `locate-file' searches for a file in a list of directories.
4143 `locate-file' accepts a name of a file to search (a string), and two
4144 lists: a list of directories to search in and a list of suffixes to
4145 try; typical usage might use `exec-path' and `load-path' for the list
4146 of directories, and `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' for the list
4147 of suffixes. The function also accepts a predicate argument to
4148 further filter candidate files.
4149
4150 One advantage of using this function is that the list of suffixes in
4151 `exec-suffixes' is OS-dependant, so this function will find
4152 executables without polluting Lisp code with OS dependencies.
4153
4154 ---
4155 *** The precedence of file name handlers has been changed.
4156
4157 Instead of choosing the first handler that matches,
4158 `find-file-name-handler' now gives precedence to a file name handler
4159 that matches nearest the end of the file name. More precisely, the
4160 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. In case
4161 of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
4162
4163 +++
4164 *** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
4165
4166 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
4167 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
4168 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
4169 operations.
4170
4171 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
4172 autoloaded when not really necessary.
4173
4174 +++
4175 *** The function `make-auto-save-file-name' is now handled by file
4176 name handlers. This will be exploited for remote files mainly.
4177
4178 ** Input changes:
4179
4180 +++
4181 *** An interactive specification can now use the code letter 'U' to get
4182 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
4183 previous `k' or `K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
4184
4185 +++
4186 *** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name
4187 much like `F', but if the input is a directory name (even defaulted),
4188 it returns just the directory name.
4189
4190 ---
4191 *** Functions `y-or-n-p', `read-char', `read-key-sequence' and the like, that
4192 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
4193 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
4194
4195 +++
4196 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input
4197 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a
4198 quit had occurred. `while-no-input' returns the value of BODY, if BODY
4199 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted by a quit, and t if
4200 BODY was aborted by arrival of input.
4201
4202 ** Minibuffer changes:
4203
4204 +++
4205 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional
4206 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it
4207 defaults to the current buffer.
4208
4209 +++
4210 *** New function `minibuffer-selected-window' returns the window which
4211 was selected when entering the minibuffer.
4212
4213 +++
4214 *** `read-from-minibuffer' now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
4215 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
4216
4217 +++
4218 *** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
4219 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The
4220 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
4221 while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this
4222 variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list.
4223
4224 ---
4225 *** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by Lisp code
4226 to override the built-in `read-file-name' function.
4227
4228 +++
4229 *** The new variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' specifies
4230 whether completion ignores case when reading a file name with the
4231 `read-file-name' function.
4232
4233 +++
4234 *** The new function `read-directory-name' is for reading a directory name.
4235
4236 It is like `read-file-name' except that the defaulting works better
4237 for directories, and completion inside it shows only directories.
4238
4239 ** Completion changes:
4240
4241 +++
4242 *** The new function `minibuffer-completion-contents' returns the contents
4243 of the minibuffer just before point. That is what completion commands
4244 operate on.
4245
4246 +++
4247 *** The functions `all-completions' and `try-completion' now accept lists
4248 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
4249 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
4250 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables can be either
4251 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
4252
4253 +++
4254 *** The new macro `dynamic-completion-table' supports using functions
4255 as a dynamic completion table.
4256
4257 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
4258
4259 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
4260 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
4261 completions. This alist can be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
4262 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
4263 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
4264 entered. `dynamic-completion-table' then computes the completion.
4265
4266 +++
4267 *** The new macro `lazy-completion-table' initializes a variable
4268 as a lazy completion table.
4269
4270 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN)
4271
4272 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
4273 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with no
4274 arguments. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR.
4275 If completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
4276 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
4277 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
4278
4279 +++
4280 ** Enhancements to keymaps.
4281
4282 *** New keymaps for typing file names
4283
4284 Two new keymaps, `minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map' and
4285 `minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map', apply whenever
4286 Emacs reads a file name in the minibuffer. These key maps override
4287 the usual binding of SPC to `minibuffer-complete-word' (so that file
4288 names with embedded spaces could be typed without the need to quote
4289 the spaces).
4290
4291 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
4292
4293 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
4294 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
4295 example,
4296
4297 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
4298
4299 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
4300
4301 This is an alternative to using `defadvice' or `substitute-key-definition'
4302 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
4303 binding and lookup functionality.
4304
4305 When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is
4306 remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the
4307 original command.
4308
4309 Example:
4310 Suppose that minor mode `my-mode' has defined the commands
4311 `my-kill-line' and `my-kill-word', and it wants C-k (and any other key
4312 bound to `kill-line') to run the command `my-kill-line' instead of
4313 `kill-line', and likewise it wants to run `my-kill-word' instead of
4314 `kill-word'.
4315
4316 Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map,
4317 command remapping allows you to directly map `kill-line' into
4318 `my-kill-line' and `kill-word' into `my-kill-word' using `define-key':
4319
4320 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line)
4321 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word)
4322
4323 When `my-mode' is enabled, its minor mode keymap is enabled too. So
4324 when the user types C-k, that runs the command `my-kill-line'.
4325
4326 Only one level of remapping is supported. In the above example, this
4327 means that if `my-kill-line' is remapped to `other-kill', then C-k still
4328 runs `my-kill-line'.
4329
4330 The following changes have been made to provide command remapping:
4331
4332 - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4333 `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD
4334 to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to
4335 another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding.
4336
4337 - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a
4338 remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped.
4339
4340 - `key-binding' now remaps interactive commands unless the optional
4341 third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil.
4342
4343 - `where-is-internal' now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g.
4344 `kill-line', when `my-mode' is enabled), and the actual key binding for
4345 the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line).
4346 It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits
4347 remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns "C-k" for `kill-line', and
4348 "<kill-line>" for `my-kill-line').
4349
4350 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
4351 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
4352 command was not remapped.
4353
4354 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
4355 over minor mode keymaps.
4356
4357 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and
4358 text properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it
4359 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property.
4360
4361 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
4362
4363 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
4364 bindings of the parent keymap.
4365
4366 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
4367
4368 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently
4369 active keymaps.
4370
4371 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all
4372 defined keys and their definitions.
4373
4374 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt string of a keymap.
4375
4376 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding
4377 in the keymap.
4378
4379 *** New variable `emulation-mode-map-alists'.
4380
4381 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
4382 keymap alist separate from `minor-mode-map-alist' by adding their
4383 keymap alist to this list.
4384
4385 ** Abbrev changes:
4386
4387 +++
4388 *** The new function `copy-abbrev-table' copies an abbrev table.
4389
4390 It returns a new abbrev table that is a copy of a given abbrev table.
4391
4392 +++
4393 *** `define-abbrev' now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG.
4394
4395 If non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means
4396 that it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the
4397 abbrevs. Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always
4398 specify this flag.
4399
4400 +++
4401 ** Enhancements to process support
4402
4403 *** Function `list-processes' now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
4404 it lists only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set.
4405
4406 *** New fns `set-process-query-on-exit-flag' and `process-query-on-exit-flag'.
4407
4408 These replace the old function `process-kill-without-query'. That
4409 function is still supported, but new code should use the new
4410 functions.
4411
4412 *** Function `signal-process' now accepts a process object or process
4413 name in addition to a process id to identify the signaled process.
4414
4415 *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can
4416 maintain process state and other per-process related information.
4417
4418 Use the new functions `process-get' and `process-put' to access, add,
4419 and modify elements on this property list. Use the new functions
4420 `process-plist' and `set-process-plist' to access and replace the
4421 entire property list of a process.
4422
4423 *** Function `accept-process-output' has a new optional fourth arg
4424 JUST-THIS-ONE. If non-nil, only output from the specified process
4425 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an
4426 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
4427 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
4428 speech synthesis.
4429
4430 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output.
4431
4432 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
4433 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
4434 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
4435 by setting the new variable `process-adaptive-read-buffering' to a
4436 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
4437 from such processes, allowing them to produce more output before
4438 emacs tries to read it.
4439
4440 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command'.
4441
4442 This executes a shell command synchronously in a separate process.
4443
4444 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but
4445 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on
4446 `default-directory'.
4447
4448 *** A process filter function gets the output as multibyte string
4449 if the process specifies t for its filter's multibyteness.
4450
4451 That multibyteness is decided by the value of
4452 `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is created, and
4453 you can change it later with `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
4454
4455 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the
4456 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4457
4458 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns the
4459 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4460
4461 *** If a process's coding system is `raw-text' or `no-conversion' and its
4462 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
4463 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
4464 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
4465 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
4466
4467 +++
4468 ** Enhanced networking support.
4469
4470 *** The new `make-network-process' function makes network connections.
4471 It allows opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as
4472 create a stream or datagram server inside emacs.
4473
4474 - A server is started using :server t arg.
4475 - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg.
4476 - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg.
4477 - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg.
4478 - IPv6 is supported (when available). You may explicitly select IPv6
4479 using :family 'ipv6 arg.
4480 - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg.
4481 - The process' property list can be initialized using :plist PLIST arg;
4482 a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited
4483 by new client processes created to handle incoming connections.
4484
4485 To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this:
4486 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram))
4487 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:family ipv6))
4488
4489 *** The old `open-network-stream' now uses `make-network-process'.
4490
4491 *** New functions `process-datagram-address', `set-process-datagram-address'.
4492
4493 These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get
4494 and set the current address of the remote partner.
4495
4496 *** New function `format-network-address'.
4497
4498 This function reformats the Lisp representation of a network address
4499 to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port
4500 number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the
4501 printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc
4502 string for other formatting options.
4503
4504 *** `process-contact' has an optional KEY argument.
4505
4506 Depending on this argument, you can get the complete list of network
4507 process properties or a specific property. Using :local or :remote as
4508 the KEY, you get the address of the local or remote end-point.
4509
4510 An Inet address is represented as a 5 element vector, where the first
4511 4 elements contain the IP address and the fifth is the port number.
4512
4513 *** New functions `stop-process' and `continue-process'.
4514
4515 These functions stop and restart communication through a network
4516 connection. For a server process, no connections are accepted in the
4517 stopped state. For a client process, no input is received in the
4518 stopped state.
4519
4520 *** New function `network-interface-list'.
4521
4522 This function returns a list of network interface names and their
4523 current network addresses.
4524
4525 *** New function `network-interface-info'.
4526
4527 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current
4528 status, and other information about a specific network interface.
4529
4530 *** Deleting a network process with `delete-process' calls the sentinel.
4531
4532 The status message passed to the sentinel for a deleted network
4533 process is "deleted". The message passed to the sentinel when the
4534 connection is closed by the remote peer has been changed to
4535 "connection broken by remote peer".
4536
4537 ** Using window objects:
4538
4539 +++
4540 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4541
4542 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line or the
4543 header line.
4544
4545 +++
4546 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4547
4548 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line
4549 or the header line.
4550
4551 +++
4552 *** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4553
4554 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4555 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4556 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4557 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4558 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4559
4560 +++
4561 *** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
4562 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
4563 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
4564 the mode line.
4565
4566 +++
4567 *** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
4568 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
4569
4570 +++
4571 *** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the
4572 selected window without impacting the order of `buffer-list'.
4573 It saves and restores the current buffer, too.
4574
4575 +++
4576 *** `select-window' takes an optional second argument NORECORD.
4577
4578 This is like `switch-to-buffer'.
4579
4580 +++
4581 *** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
4582 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
4583 by calling `select-window'. It also saves and restores the current
4584 buffer.
4585
4586 +++
4587 *** `set-window-buffer' has an optional argument KEEP-MARGINS.
4588
4589 If non-nil, that says to preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
4590 and scroll-bar settings.
4591
4592 +++
4593 *** The new function `window-tree' returns a frame's window tree.
4594
4595 +++
4596 *** The functions `get-lru-window' and `get-largest-window' take an optional
4597 argument `dedicated'. If non-nil, those functions do not ignore
4598 dedicated windows.
4599
4600 +++
4601 *** The new function `adjust-window-trailing-edge' moves the right
4602 or bottom edge of a window. It does not move other window edges.
4603
4604 +++
4605 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
4606
4607 *** New buffer-local variables `fringe-indicator-alist' and
4608 `fringe-cursor-alist' maps between logical (internal) fringe indicator
4609 and cursor symbols and the actual fringe bitmaps to be displayed.
4610 This decouples the logical meaning of the fringe indicators from the
4611 physical appearence, as well as allowing different fringe bitmaps to
4612 be used in different windows showing different buffers.
4613
4614 *** New function `define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
4615 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
4616
4617 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
4618 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation' or `continued-line'.
4619
4620 *** New function `destroy-fringe-bitmap' deletes a fringe bitmap
4621 or restores a built-in one to its default value.
4622
4623 *** New function `set-fringe-bitmap-face' specifies the face to be
4624 used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is automatically merged
4625 with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face should only specify the
4626 foreground color of the bitmap.
4627
4628 *** There are new display properties, `left-fringe' and `right-fringe',
4629 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
4630 bitmap of the display line.
4631
4632 Format is `display (left-fringe BITMAP [FACE])', where BITMAP is a
4633 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
4634 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
4635 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
4636 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
4637
4638 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
4639 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
4640
4641 ** Other window fringe features:
4642
4643 +++
4644 *** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
4645
4646 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
4647 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
4648 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
4649 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
4650
4651 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
4652 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
4653 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
4654 between the left and right fringe. To force a specific fringe width,
4655 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
4656 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
4657
4658 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
4659 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
4660 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
4661 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
4662
4663 +++
4664 *** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings
4665
4666 **** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and
4667 position settings.
4668
4669 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
4670 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
4671 `set-window-fringes'.
4672
4673 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
4674 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
4675 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
4676 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
4677
4678 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
4679 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
4680 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
4681 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
4682 an update of the display margins.
4683
4684 **** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
4685 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
4686
4687 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
4688 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
4689 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
4690 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
4691 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4692 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4693 of the display margins.
4694
4695 ** Redisplay features:
4696
4697 +++
4698 *** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
4699
4700 +++
4701 *** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
4702 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
4703 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
4704 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
4705 forcing an explicit window update.
4706
4707 +++
4708 *** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
4709 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
4710 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
4711
4712 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
4713 does that, this value cannot be accurate.
4714
4715 +++
4716 *** You can define multiple overlay arrows via the new
4717 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'.
4718
4719 It contains a list of varibles which contain overlay arrow position
4720 markers, including the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
4721
4722 Each variable on this list can have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
4723 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
4724 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
4725 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
4726 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
4727 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
4728
4729 +++
4730 *** New `line-height' and `line-spacing' properties for newline characters
4731
4732 A newline can now have `line-height' and `line-spacing' text or overlay
4733 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
4734
4735 If the `line-height' property value is t, the newline does not
4736 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
4737 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a `line-spacing' property on this
4738 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
4739 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
4740
4741 If the `line-height' property value is a positive integer, the value
4742 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
4743 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
4744
4745 If the `line-height' property value is a float, the minimum line
4746 height is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by
4747 the given value.
4748
4749 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
4750 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
4751 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
4752
4753 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
4754 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
4755
4756 If the `line-height' value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
4757 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
4758 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
4759 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
4760 exactly that many pixels high.
4761
4762 If the `line-spacing' property value is an positive integer, the value
4763 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
4764 overrides the default frame `line-spacing' and any buffer local value of
4765 the `line-spacing' variable.
4766
4767 If the `line-spacing' property is a float or cons, the line spacing
4768 is calculated as specified above for the `line-height' property.
4769
4770 +++
4771 *** The buffer local `line-spacing' variable can now have a float value,
4772 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
4773
4774 +++
4775 *** Enhancements to stretch display properties
4776
4777 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
4778 PROPS is a property list, now allows pixel based width and height
4779 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
4780
4781 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
4782 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
4783 are supported:
4784
4785 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
4786 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
4787 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4788 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4789 | scroll-bar | text
4790 POS ::= left | center | right
4791 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
4792 OP ::= + | -
4793
4794 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
4795 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
4796 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
4797 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
4798 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
4799 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
4800 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
4801 the image.
4802
4803 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
4804 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
4805 corresponding area of the window.
4806
4807 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
4808 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
4809 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
4810 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
4811 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
4812 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
4813 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as
4814 the width of the area.
4815
4816 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
4817 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4818
4819 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4820 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
4821 header line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4822
4823 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
4824 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
4825 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
4826 height) of the specified image.
4827
4828 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
4829 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
4830
4831 +++
4832 *** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
4833 text property string that may be present at the current window
4834 position. The cursor can now be placed on any character of such
4835 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
4836
4837 +++
4838 *** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
4839 supported on text terminals.
4840
4841 +++
4842 *** Support for displaying image slices
4843
4844 **** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) can be used with
4845 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
4846
4847 **** Function `insert-image' has new optional fourth arg to
4848 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
4849
4850 **** New function `insert-sliced-image' inserts a given image as a
4851 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
4852
4853 +++
4854 *** Images can now have an associated image map via the :map property.
4855
4856 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
4857 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
4858 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((X0 . Y0) . (X1 . Y1))) specifying the
4859 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
4860 A circle is a cons (circle . ((X0 . Y0) . R)) specifying the center
4861 and the radius of the circle; R can be a float or integer.
4862 A polygon is a cons (poly . [X0 Y0 X1 Y1 ...]) where each pair in the
4863 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
4864
4865 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
4866 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
4867 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
4868 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
4869 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable `void-area-text-pointer'
4870 for possible pointer shapes.
4871
4872 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
4873 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
4874 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
4875
4876 +++
4877 *** The function `find-image' now searches in etc/images/ and etc/.
4878 The new variable `image-load-path' is a list of locations in which to
4879 search for image files. The default is to search in etc/images, then
4880 in etc/, and finally in the directories specified by `load-path'.
4881 Subdirectories of etc/ and etc/images are not recursively searched; if
4882 you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to specify it
4883 explicitly; for example, if an image is put in etc/images/foo/bar.xpm:
4884
4885 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
4886
4887 Note that all images formerly located in the lisp directory have been
4888 moved to etc/images.
4889
4890 +++
4891 *** New function `image-load-path-for-library' returns a suitable
4892 search path for images relative to library. This function is useful in
4893 external packages to save users from having to update
4894 `image-load-path'.
4895
4896 +++
4897 *** The new variable `max-image-size' defines the maximum size of
4898 images that Emacs will load and display.
4899
4900 ** Mouse pointer features:
4901
4902 +++ (lispref)
4903 ??? (man)
4904 *** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
4905 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
4906 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
4907 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
4908 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
4909
4910 +++
4911 *** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
4912 :pointer image property.
4913
4914 +++
4915 *** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images can now be
4916 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property.
4917
4918 ** Mouse event enhancements:
4919
4920 +++
4921 *** Mouse events for clicks on window fringes now specify `left-fringe'
4922 or `right-fringe' as the area.
4923
4924 +++
4925 *** All mouse events now include a buffer position regardless of where
4926 you clicked. For mouse clicks in window margins and fringes, this is
4927 a sensible buffer position corresponding to the surrounding text.
4928
4929 +++
4930 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
4931
4932 +++
4933 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
4934
4935 +++
4936 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
4937 text area).
4938
4939 +++
4940 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types
4941 and all areas.
4942
4943 +++
4944 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns the actual glyph coordinates
4945 of the mouse event position.
4946
4947 +++
4948 *** Mouse events can now indicate an image object clicked on.
4949
4950 +++
4951 *** Mouse events include relative X and Y pixel coordinates relative to
4952 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
4953
4954 +++
4955 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
4956 (image or character) clicked on.
4957
4958 +++
4959 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', 'posn-object-width-height'.
4960
4961 These return the image or string object of a mouse click, the X and Y
4962 pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner of that object, and
4963 the total width and height of that object.
4964
4965 ** Text property and overlay changes:
4966
4967 +++
4968 *** Arguments for `remove-overlays' are now optional, so that you can
4969 remove all overlays in the buffer with just (remove-overlays).
4970
4971 +++
4972 *** New variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
4973
4974 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
4975 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
4976 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
4977 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
4978
4979 +++
4980 *** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same
4981 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
4982 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
4983 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
4984 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
4985
4986 +++
4987 *** The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties'.
4988
4989 It is like `remove-text-properties' except that it takes a list of
4990 property names as argument rather than a property list.
4991
4992 ** Face changes
4993
4994 +++
4995 *** The new face attribute condition `min-colors' can be used to tailor
4996 the face color to the number of colors supported by a display, and
4997 define the foreground and background colors accordingly so that they
4998 look best on a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This
4999 is now the preferred method for defining default faces in a way that
5000 makes a good use of the capabilities of the display.
5001
5002 +++
5003 *** New function `display-supports-face-attributes-p' can be used to test
5004 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
5005
5006 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
5007 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
5008 defined with `defface'.
5009
5010 ---
5011 *** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
5012 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
5013 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
5014 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
5015 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
5016
5017 +++
5018 *** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
5019 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
5020 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and can be overridden
5021 by them).
5022
5023 +++
5024 *** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
5025 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
5026 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
5027 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
5028 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
5029
5030 ---
5031 *** The function `face-differs-from-default-p' now truly checks
5032 whether the given face displays differently from the default face or
5033 not (previously it did only a very cursory check).
5034
5035 +++
5036 *** `face-attribute', `face-foreground', `face-background', `face-stipple'.
5037
5038 These now accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how
5039 face inheritance is used when determining the value of a face
5040 attribute.
5041
5042 +++
5043 *** New functions `face-attribute-relative-p' and `merge-face-attribute'
5044 help with handling relative face attributes.
5045
5046 +++
5047 *** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face list is reversed.
5048
5049 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
5050 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous
5051 releases of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made
5052 so that :inherit face lists operate identically to face lists in text
5053 `face' properties.
5054
5055 ---
5056 *** On terminals, faces with the :inverse-video attribute are displayed
5057 with swapped foreground and background colors even when one of them is
5058 not specified. In previous releases of Emacs, if either foreground
5059 or background color was unspecified, colors were not swapped. This
5060 was inconsistent with the face behavior under X.
5061
5062 ---
5063 *** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on
5064 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil..
5065
5066 ** Font-Lock changes:
5067
5068 +++
5069 *** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
5070
5071 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
5072 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
5073 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
5074 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
5075
5076 +++
5077 *** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
5078
5079 **** the FACENAME returned in `font-lock-keywords' can be a list of the
5080 form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set other
5081 properties than `face'.
5082
5083 **** `font-lock-extra-managed-props' can be set to make sure those
5084 extra properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
5085
5086 ---
5087 *** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
5088
5089 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
5090 (see `jit-lock-defer-contextually'), then all of that text will
5091 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
5092 depends on text several lines further down (and when `font-lock-multiline'
5093 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
5094
5095 s{
5096 foo
5097 }{
5098 bar
5099 }e
5100
5101 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
5102 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a `jit-lock-defer-multiline'
5103 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
5104 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
5105
5106 ** Major mode mechanism changes:
5107
5108 +++
5109 *** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
5110 precedence over the file name. Likewise an `<?xml' or `<!DOCTYPE'
5111 declaration will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new
5112 variable `magic-mode-alist'.
5113
5114 +++
5115 *** Use the new function `run-mode-hooks' to run the major mode's mode hook.
5116
5117 +++
5118 *** All major mode functions should now run the new normal hook
5119 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode
5120 hooks. `run-mode-hooks' does this automatically.
5121
5122 ---
5123 *** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
5124 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
5125 it in that buffer.
5126
5127 +++
5128 *** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
5129 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
5130 the language.
5131
5132 +++
5133 *** `define-derived-mode' by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
5134 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
5135
5136 +++
5137 *** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
5138 are used by `define-derived-mode' to make sure the mode hook for the
5139 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
5140
5141 ** Minor mode changes:
5142
5143 +++
5144 *** `define-minor-mode' now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
5145 and simply passes them to `defcustom', if applicable.
5146
5147 +++
5148 *** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
5149
5150 +++
5151 *** `define-global-minor-mode'.
5152
5153 This is a new name for what was formerly called
5154 `easy-mmode-define-global-mode'. The old name remains as an alias.
5155
5156 ** Command loop changes:
5157
5158 +++
5159 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
5160 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' to do: it returns t if the
5161 calling function was called through `call-interactively'.
5162
5163 Only use this when you cannot solve the problem by adding a new
5164 INTERACTIVE argument to the command.
5165
5166 +++
5167 *** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional argument.
5168
5169 If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks for a function that could be
5170 called with `call-interactively', and does not return t for keyboard
5171 macros.
5172
5173 +++
5174 *** When a command returns, the command loop moves point out from
5175 within invisible text, in the same way it moves out from within text
5176 covered by an image or composition property.
5177
5178 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
5179 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
5180 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
5181 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
5182 `post-command-hook' and thus does not care about intermediate states.
5183
5184 +++
5185 *** If a command sets `transient-mark-mode' to `only', that
5186 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only.
5187 During that following command, the value of `transient-mark-mode'
5188 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command,
5189 the next return to the command loop changes to nil.
5190
5191 +++
5192 *** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
5193 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
5194 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
5195
5196 +++
5197 *** `emacsserver' now runs `pre-command-hook' and `post-command-hook'
5198 when it receives a request from emacsclient.
5199
5200 ** Lisp file loading changes:
5201
5202 +++
5203 *** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
5204 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
5205 current file redefined it).
5206
5207 +++
5208 *** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
5209 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
5210
5211 +++
5212 *** The function `symbol-file' can now search specifically for function,
5213 variable or face definitions.
5214
5215 +++
5216 *** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
5217 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
5218 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
5219
5220 ---
5221 *** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
5222 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
5223 than 3 levels of nesting.
5224
5225 +++
5226 ** Byte compiler changes:
5227
5228 *** The byte compiler now displays the actual line and character
5229 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its
5230 warning and error messages have been brought into line with GNU standards
5231 for these. As a result, you can use next-error and friends on the
5232 compilation output buffer.
5233
5234 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
5235 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
5236
5237 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
5238 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
5239 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
5240 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
5241 forms:
5242
5243 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
5244 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
5245
5246 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
5247 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
5248 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
5249 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
5250 macro expansion), but such tests can be nested. Note that `when' and
5251 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
5252
5253 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
5254 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
5255 Emacs and XEmacs and can sometimes make the result significantly more
5256 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
5257 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
5258 you anything.
5259
5260 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in Lisp files is now obeyed.
5261
5262 ---
5263 *** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
5264 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
5265 (require 'cl) when loaded.
5266
5267 ** Frame operations:
5268
5269 +++
5270 *** New functions `frame-current-scroll-bars' and `window-current-scroll-bars'.
5271
5272 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
5273 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
5274
5275 +++
5276 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
5277 for all (existing and future) frames.
5278
5279 +++
5280 *** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
5281 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
5282 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
5283 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
5284
5285 +++
5286 *** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
5287 the `scroll-bar-width' frame parameter value is nil.
5288
5289 ** Mule changes:
5290
5291 +++
5292 *** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
5293
5294 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
5295 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
5296 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
5297 now:
5298
5299 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
5300
5301 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
5302 the time it takes to convert the format.
5303
5304 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
5305 wasteful.
5306
5307 ---
5308 *** `set-buffer-file-coding-system' now takes an additional argument,
5309 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
5310
5311 +++
5312 *** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
5313 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
5314 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
5315 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
5316
5317 ---
5318 *** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
5319 of one coding system from another coding system.
5320
5321 ---
5322 *** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
5323 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
5324 parts, e.g. utf-16.
5325
5326 +++
5327 *** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
5328 it is read from a file without decoding.
5329
5330 ---
5331 *** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
5332 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
5333
5334 ---
5335 *** New function `quail-find-key' returns a list of keys to type in the
5336 current input method to input a character.
5337
5338 ** Mode line changes:
5339
5340 +++
5341 *** New function `format-mode-line'.
5342
5343 This returns the mode line or header line of the selected (or a
5344 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
5345
5346 +++
5347 *** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
5348 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
5349
5350 +++
5351 *** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
5352 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
5353 line.
5354
5355 +++
5356 *** Mouse-face on mode-line (and header-line) is now supported.
5357
5358 ** Menu manipulation changes:
5359
5360 ---
5361 *** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
5362 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
5363 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
5364 several versions ago.
5365
5366 ---
5367 *** The dummy function keys made by easy-menu are now always lower case.
5368 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
5369 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
5370
5371 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were
5372 made with easy-menu.
5373
5374 ---
5375 *** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
5376 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
5377 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
5378 need to have a name.
5379
5380 ** Operating system access:
5381
5382 +++
5383 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
5384 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
5385
5386 +++
5387 *** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
5388 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
5389 accepts a float as UID parameter.
5390
5391 +++
5392 *** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
5393
5394 ---
5395 *** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
5396 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
5397 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
5398
5399 ---
5400 *** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
5401 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
5402
5403 ** Miscellaneous:
5404
5405 +++
5406 *** A number of hooks have been renamed to better follow the conventions:
5407
5408 `find-file-hooks' to `find-file-hook',
5409 `find-file-not-found-hooks' to `find-file-not-found-functions',
5410 `write-file-hooks' to `write-file-functions',
5411 `write-contents-hooks' to `write-contents-functions',
5412 `x-lost-selection-hooks' to `x-lost-selection-functions',
5413 `x-sent-selection-hooks' to `x-sent-selection-functions',
5414 `delete-frame-hook' to `delete-frame-functions'.
5415
5416 In each case the old name remains as an alias for the moment.
5417
5418 +++
5419 *** Variable `local-write-file-hooks' is marked obsolete.
5420
5421 Use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'.
5422
5423 ---
5424 *** New function `x-send-client-message' sends a client message when
5425 running under X.
5426
5427 ** GC changes:
5428
5429 +++
5430 *** New variable `gc-cons-percentage' automatically grows the GC cons threshold
5431 as the heap size increases.
5432
5433 +++
5434 *** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
5435 on garbage collection.
5436
5437 +++
5438 *** The normal hook `post-gc-hook' is run at the end of garbage collection.
5439
5440 The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
5441 \f
5442 * New Packages for Lisp Programming in Emacs 22.1
5443
5444 +++
5445 ** The new library button.el implements simple and fast `clickable
5446 buttons' in emacs buffers. Buttons are much lighter-weight than the
5447 `widgets' implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that
5448 doesn't require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for
5449 such things as help and apropos buffers.
5450
5451 ---
5452 ** The new library tree-widget.el provides a widget to display a set
5453 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
5454 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
5455
5456 +++
5457 ** The new library bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
5458 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
5459 data structures.
5460
5461 ---
5462 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
5463 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
5464
5465 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
5466 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
5467 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
5468 commands.
5469
5470 This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable
5471 sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the
5472 SQL buffer.
5473
5474 (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook
5475 (function (lambda ()
5476 (master-mode t)
5477 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5478 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
5479 (function (lambda ()
5480 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5481
5482 +++
5483 ** The new library benchmark.el does timing measurements on Lisp code.
5484
5485 This includes measuring garbage collection time.
5486
5487 +++
5488 ** The new library testcover.el does test coverage checking.
5489
5490 This is so you can tell whether you've tested all paths in your Lisp
5491 code. It works with edebug.
5492
5493 The function `testcover-start' instruments all functions in a given
5494 file. Then test your code. The function `testcover-mark-all' adds
5495 overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to show where coverage
5496 is lacking. The command `testcover-next-mark' (bind it to a key!)
5497 will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
5498
5499 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely
5500 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same
5501 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly
5502 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are
5503 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same
5504 value, such as (setq x 14).
5505
5506 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to
5507 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a
5508 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does
5509 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument.
5510 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals
5511 an error if the argument actually returns differing values.
5512 \f
5513 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
5514
5515 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
5516 been added.
5517
5518 \f
5519 * Changes in Emacs 21.3
5520
5521 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
5522 with Custom.
5523
5524 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters
5525 as mule-utf-8.
5526
5527 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically
5528 in UTF-8 locales).
5529
5530 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in
5531 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the
5532 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode'
5533 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation
5534 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding
5535 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that
5536 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but
5537 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read
5538 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable.
5539 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on.
5540
5541 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of
5542 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'.
5543
5544 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to
5545 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using
5546 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding
5547 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behavior is actually
5548 contrary to the compound text specification.
5549
5550 \f
5551 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2
5552
5553 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added.
5554
5555 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
5556
5557 \f
5558 * Changes in Emacs 21.2
5559
5560 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections.
5561
5562 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in
5563 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the
5564 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste
5565 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system
5566 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system.
5567
5568 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
5569 were changed.
5570
5571 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
5572 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
5573
5574 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
5575 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
5576 instead of using default-major-mode.
5577
5578 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
5579 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
5580 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
5581 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
5582 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
5583 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
5584 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
5585
5586 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
5587 NEWS.
5588
5589 \f
5590 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2
5591
5592 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
5593 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
5594 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
5595
5596 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
5597 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
5598
5599 \f
5600 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
5601
5602 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
5603 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
5604 charsets in this release.
5605
5606 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
5607
5608 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
5609
5610 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
5611 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
5612 to list them.
5613
5614 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
5615 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
5616 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
5617 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
5618 necessary changes to unexec.
5619
5620 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
5621 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
5622
5623 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
5624 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5625
5626 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
5627 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
5628
5629 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
5630 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
5631 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
5632 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
5633 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
5634
5635 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
5636 new display features described below.
5637
5638 \f
5639 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
5640
5641 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
5642
5643 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
5644 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
5645 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
5646 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
5647 the text.
5648
5649 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
5650
5651 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
5652 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
5653 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
5654 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
5655 specify a font.
5656
5657 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
5658 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
5659 under Lisp changes, below.
5660
5661 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
5662
5663 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
5664 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
5665 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
5666 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
5667 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
5668 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
5669 on terminals.
5670
5671 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
5672 supported on character terminals.
5673
5674 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
5675 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
5676 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
5677 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
5678
5679 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
5680
5681 ** Sound support
5682
5683 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
5684 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
5685 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
5686 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
5687 sound support.
5688
5689 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
5690
5691 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
5692 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
5693 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
5694 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
5695
5696 - User option: max-mini-window-height
5697
5698 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
5699 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
5700 specifies a number of lines.
5701
5702 Default is 0.25.
5703
5704 - User option: resize-mini-windows
5705
5706 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5707 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
5708 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
5709 again.
5710
5711 Default is `grow-only'.
5712
5713 ** LessTif support.
5714
5715 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
5716 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
5717
5718 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
5719
5720 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
5721 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
5722 non-nil.
5723
5724 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
5725
5726 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
5727 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
5728 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
5729
5730 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
5731
5732 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
5733 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
5734 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
5735 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
5736 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
5737 Emacs.
5738
5739 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
5740 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
5741 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
5742 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
5743 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
5744 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
5745
5746 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
5747 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
5748 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
5749 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
5750 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
5751 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
5752
5753 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
5754 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
5755 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
5756 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
5757 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
5758
5759 ** Tool bar support.
5760
5761 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
5762 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
5763 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
5764 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
5765 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
5766 icons will be used.
5767
5768 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
5769 for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
5770
5771 ** Tooltips.
5772
5773 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
5774 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
5775 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
5776
5777 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
5778 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
5779 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
5780 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
5781
5782 ** Automatic Hscrolling
5783
5784 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
5785 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
5786 customized.
5787
5788 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
5789 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
5790 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
5791 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
5792 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
5793
5794 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
5795 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
5796 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
5797 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
5798 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
5799 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
5800
5801 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
5802 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
5803 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
5804 customizing face `fringe'.
5805
5806 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
5807 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
5808 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
5809 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
5810 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
5811 the window to be partially obscured.)
5812
5813 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
5814 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
5815 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
5816 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
5817
5818 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
5819
5820 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
5821 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
5822 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
5823 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
5824 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
5825 have enabled one.
5826
5827 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
5828
5829 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
5830
5831 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
5832
5833 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
5834 `*') toggles the status.
5835
5836 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
5837
5838 ** Hourglass pointer
5839
5840 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
5841 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
5842
5843 ** Blinking cursor
5844
5845 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
5846 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
5847 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
5848 the group `cursor'.
5849
5850 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
5851
5852 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
5853 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
5854 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
5855 details.
5856
5857 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
5858 have to do anything to activate it.
5859
5860 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
5861
5862 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
5863 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
5864
5865 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
5866 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
5867 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
5868 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
5869 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
5870 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
5871 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
5872 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
5873
5874 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
5875 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
5876 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
5877 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
5878 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
5879 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
5880
5881 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
5882 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
5883
5884 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
5885 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
5886 buffer by default.
5887
5888 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
5889 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
5890 beginning and end of the buffer.
5891
5892 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
5893 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
5894 signaled.
5895
5896 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
5897 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
5898
5899 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
5900 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
5901 this behavior.
5902
5903 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
5904 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
5905 Emacs dump core.
5906
5907 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
5908
5909 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
5910 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
5911 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
5912
5913 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
5914 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
5915 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
5916
5917 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
5918 using that menu.
5919
5920 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
5921
5922 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
5923 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
5924 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
5925 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
5926 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
5927 whitespace.
5928
5929 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
5930 all frames except the selected one.
5931
5932 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
5933 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
5934
5935 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
5936 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
5937 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
5938 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
5939 `Info-use-header-line'.
5940
5941 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
5942 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
5943 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
5944
5945 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
5946
5947 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5948 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
5949 `fr-drdref.tex'.
5950
5951 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
5952 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
5953 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
5954 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
5955
5956 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
5957
5958 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
5959 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
5960 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
5961 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
5962
5963 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
5964 point in a pop-up window.
5965
5966 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
5967 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
5968 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
5969
5970 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
5971 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
5972
5973 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
5974 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
5975 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
5976 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
5977
5978 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
5979
5980 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
5981 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
5982
5983 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
5984 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
5985 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
5986
5987 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
5988 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
5989 non-nil.
5990
5991 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
5992 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
5993 file that is already visited under a different name.
5994
5995 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
5996 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
5997
5998 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
5999 and displays information about that.
6000
6001 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
6002 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
6003
6004 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
6005 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
6006 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
6007 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
6008 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
6009 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
6010
6011 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
6012 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
6013
6014 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
6015 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
6016 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
6017 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
6018 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
6019 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
6020 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
6021
6022 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
6023 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
6024
6025 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
6026 system for keyboard input.
6027
6028 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
6029 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
6030 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
6031 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
6032 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
6033 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
6034 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
6035 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
6036 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
6037
6038 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
6039 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
6040
6041 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
6042 displays all characters in that character set.
6043
6044 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
6045 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
6046
6047 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
6048 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
6049 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
6050
6051 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
6052 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
6053 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
6054 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
6055 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
6056 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
6057 and Polish `slash'.
6058
6059 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
6060 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
6061 of the tutorial.
6062
6063 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
6064 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
6065 Lisp Coding Convention".
6066
6067 new command old-binding
6068 --- ------- -----------
6069 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
6070 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
6071 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
6072
6073 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
6074 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
6075 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
6076
6077 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
6078 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
6079 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
6080 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
6081 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
6082 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
6083
6084 ** There are new Leim input methods.
6085 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
6086 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
6087 package.
6088
6089 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
6090 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
6091 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
6092 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
6093 "`", you must type "=q".
6094
6095 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
6096 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
6097 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
6098 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
6099 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
6100 on.
6101
6102 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
6103 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
6104 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
6105 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
6106
6107 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
6108 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
6109 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
6110 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
6111
6112 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
6113 on the display using several methods
6114
6115 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
6116 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
6117 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
6118
6119 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
6120 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
6121
6122 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
6123
6124 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
6125 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
6126
6127 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
6128 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
6129 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
6130 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
6131
6132 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
6133 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
6134 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
6135
6136 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
6137 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
6138
6139 ** New X resources recognized
6140
6141 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
6142 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
6143 is useful for debugging X problems.
6144
6145 Example:
6146
6147 emacs.synchronous: true
6148
6149 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
6150 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
6151 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
6152 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
6153 visual class names are
6154
6155 TrueColor
6156 PseudoColor
6157 DirectColor
6158 StaticColor
6159 GrayScale
6160 StaticGray
6161
6162 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
6163 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
6164 meaning.
6165
6166 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
6167 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
6168 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
6169 visual.
6170
6171 Example:
6172
6173 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
6174
6175 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
6176 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
6177 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
6178 resource values are `true' or `on'.
6179
6180 Example:
6181
6182 emacs.privateColormap: true
6183
6184 ** Faces and frame parameters.
6185
6186 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
6187 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
6188 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
6189 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
6190 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
6191 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
6192 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
6193
6194 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
6195 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
6196 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
6197 `default' face and vice versa.
6198
6199 ** New face `menu'.
6200
6201 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
6202
6203 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
6204
6205 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
6206 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
6207 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
6208 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
6209
6210 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
6211 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
6212 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
6213
6214 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
6215 `ScreenGamma'.
6216
6217 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
6218
6219 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
6220 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
6221 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
6222 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
6223
6224 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
6225
6226 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
6227
6228 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
6229
6230 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
6231 LessTif/Motif one.
6232
6233 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
6234 LessTif and Motif.
6235
6236 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
6237
6238 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
6239 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
6240 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
6241
6242 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
6243 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
6244
6245 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
6246 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
6247 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
6248
6249 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
6250
6251 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
6252 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
6253 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6254 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
6255
6256 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
6257 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
6258 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6259 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
6260
6261 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
6262 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
6263 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
6264 buffers.
6265
6266 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
6267
6268 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
6269 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
6270 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
6271
6272 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
6273 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
6274 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
6275 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
6276 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
6277 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
6278
6279 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
6280
6281 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
6282 notably at the end of lines.
6283
6284 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
6285 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
6286
6287 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
6288
6289 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
6290 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
6291
6292 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
6293 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
6294 after each match to get the replacement text.
6295
6296 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
6297 you edit the replacement string.
6298
6299 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
6300 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
6301 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
6302
6303 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
6304
6305 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
6306 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
6307
6308 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6309 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
6310 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
6311 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
6312
6313 --
6314 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
6315 read mail from the menu etc.
6316
6317 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
6318 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
6319 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
6320 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
6321
6322 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
6323 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
6324
6325 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
6326 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
6327 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
6328 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
6329 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
6330 of Emacs.
6331
6332 ** Customize changes
6333
6334 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
6335 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
6336 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
6337 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
6338 earlier versions of Emacs.
6339
6340 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
6341 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
6342 default).
6343
6344 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6345 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
6346 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
6347 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
6348 file.
6349
6350 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6351 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
6352 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
6353 already in your init file.
6354
6355 ** New features in evaluation commands
6356
6357 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
6358 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
6359 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
6360 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
6361 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
6362
6363 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
6364 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
6365 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
6366 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
6367 printed).
6368
6369 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
6370 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
6371
6372 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
6373 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
6374
6375 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
6376 code when called with a prefix argument.
6377
6378 ** CC mode changes.
6379
6380 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
6381 current user setups (although it's believed that these
6382 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
6383 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
6384 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
6385 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
6386 release.
6387
6388 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
6389 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
6390 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
6391 confusion.
6392
6393 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
6394 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
6395 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
6396 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
6397
6398 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
6399 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
6400
6401 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
6402 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
6403
6404 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
6405 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
6406 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
6407 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
6408
6409 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
6410 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
6411 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
6412 earlier statement. An example:
6413
6414 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
6415 if (a[i])
6416 res += a[i]->offset;
6417 else
6418
6419 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
6420 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
6421 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
6422 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
6423 the preceding "if".
6424
6425 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
6426 by default.
6427
6428 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
6429 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
6430 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
6431 documentation or other natural language text.
6432
6433 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
6434 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
6435 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
6436 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
6437 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
6438 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
6439 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
6440
6441 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
6442 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
6443 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
6444 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
6445
6446 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
6447 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
6448 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
6449 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
6450 Pike mode only.
6451
6452 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
6453 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
6454 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
6455 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
6456 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
6457 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
6458 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
6459 is reported afterwards.
6460
6461 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
6462 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
6463 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
6464
6465 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
6466 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
6467 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
6468 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
6469 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
6470 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
6471 groundwork.
6472
6473 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
6474 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
6475 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
6476 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
6477 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
6478 have to bother.
6479
6480 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
6481 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
6482 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
6483 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
6484 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
6485 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
6486
6487 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
6488 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
6489 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
6490 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
6491 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
6492 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
6493 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
6494 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
6495
6496 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
6497 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
6498 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
6499 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
6500 above.
6501
6502 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
6503 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
6504 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
6505 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
6506 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
6507 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
6508 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
6509 function documentation for more info.
6510
6511 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
6512 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
6513 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
6514 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
6515 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
6516 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
6517 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
6518 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
6519
6520 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
6521
6522 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
6523 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
6524
6525 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
6526 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
6527 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
6528 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
6529 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
6530 style system.
6531
6532 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
6533 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
6534 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
6535 as far as possible.
6536
6537 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
6538 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
6539 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
6540 chapter about this in the manual.
6541
6542 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
6543 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
6544 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
6545 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
6546 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
6547
6548 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
6549 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
6550 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
6551
6552 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
6553 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
6554
6555 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
6556 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
6557 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
6558 inside CC Mode.
6559
6560 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
6561 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
6562 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
6563 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
6564 cc-mode/).
6565
6566 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
6567 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
6568 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
6569 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
6570 they were before the filling.
6571
6572 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
6573 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
6574 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
6575 literals.
6576
6577 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
6578 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
6579 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
6580 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
6581 this function.
6582
6583 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
6584 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
6585 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
6586 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
6587 Thanks to Eric Eide.
6588
6589 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
6590 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
6591 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
6592
6593 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
6594
6595 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
6596 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
6597 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
6598 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
6599
6600 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
6601 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
6602 the column specified by comment-column.
6603
6604 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
6605 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
6606 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
6607 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
6608 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
6609 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
6610
6611 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
6612 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
6613 arguments.
6614
6615 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
6616
6617 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
6618 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
6619 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
6620 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
6621 Provan).
6622
6623 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
6624
6625 ** Dired changes
6626
6627 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
6628 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
6629 is, delete only empty directories.
6630
6631 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
6632 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
6633 copy directories recursively.
6634
6635 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
6636 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
6637 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
6638
6639 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
6640 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
6641 directory.
6642
6643 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
6644 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
6645 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
6646 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
6647 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
6648
6649 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
6650 from ls switches.
6651
6652 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
6653 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
6654 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
6655 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
6656
6657 ** Gnus changes.
6658
6659 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
6660 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
6661 internationalization and mail-fetching.
6662
6663 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
6664 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
6665
6666 If you used procmail like in
6667
6668 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
6669 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
6670 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
6671 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
6672
6673 this now has changed to
6674
6675 (setq mail-sources
6676 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
6677 :suffix ".in")))
6678
6679 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
6680 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
6681
6682 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
6683 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
6684 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
6685 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
6686
6687 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
6688 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
6689 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
6690
6691 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
6692 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
6693 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
6694 now just a compatibility layer.
6695
6696 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
6697 Gnus facilities.
6698
6699 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
6700 called to position point.
6701
6702 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
6703 summary buffers and NOV files.
6704
6705 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
6706 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
6707
6708 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
6709 subtly different manner.
6710
6711 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
6712 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
6713 ever-changing layouts.
6714
6715 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
6716
6717 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
6718
6719 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
6720
6721 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
6722 macros
6723
6724 Key binding Macro
6725 -------------------------
6726 C-c C-c C-s @strong
6727 C-c C-c C-e @emph
6728 C-c C-c u @uref
6729 C-c C-c q @quotation
6730 C-c C-c m @email
6731 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
6732 M-RET @item
6733
6734 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
6735
6736 ** Changes in Outline mode.
6737
6738 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
6739 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
6740 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
6741
6742 ** Changes to Emacs Server
6743
6744 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
6745 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
6746 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
6747 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
6748 buffers to kill, as before.
6749
6750 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
6751 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
6752 this way.
6753
6754 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
6755 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
6756
6757 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
6758
6759 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
6760 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
6761 use. Default is 1000.
6762
6763 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
6764 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
6765
6766 ** Changes to hideshow.el
6767
6768 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
6769
6770 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
6771 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
6772 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
6773 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
6774
6775 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
6776 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
6777 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
6778 the open block.
6779
6780 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
6781 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
6782 the normal block-hiding function.
6783
6784 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
6785
6786 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
6787 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
6788 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
6789 for `hs-minor-mode'.
6790
6791 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
6792 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
6793
6794 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
6795
6796 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
6797 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
6798 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
6799
6800 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
6801 current buffer.
6802
6803 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
6804 in a log file.
6805
6806 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
6807 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
6808 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
6809 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
6810 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
6811 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
6812
6813 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
6814
6815 ** Changes to cmuscheme
6816
6817 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
6818 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
6819
6820 ** Changes in Font Lock
6821
6822 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
6823 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
6824
6825 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
6826 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
6827
6828 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
6829 the face used for each string/comment.
6830
6831 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
6832 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
6833
6834 ** Changes to Shell mode
6835
6836 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
6837 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
6838 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
6839 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
6840
6841 ** Comint (subshell) changes
6842
6843 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
6844 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
6845
6846 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
6847 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
6848 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
6849 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
6850 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
6851 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
6852
6853 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
6854 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
6855 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
6856 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
6857 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
6858 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
6859 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
6860 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
6861
6862 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
6863 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
6864
6865 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
6866 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
6867 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
6868
6869 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
6870 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
6871 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
6872
6873 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
6874 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
6875 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
6876
6877 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
6878 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
6879 argument, it appends to the file.
6880
6881 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
6882 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
6883 compatibility.
6884
6885 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
6886 ring (history).
6887
6888 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6889 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
6890 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
6891
6892 ** Changes to Rmail mode
6893
6894 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
6895 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
6896 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
6897 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
6898 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
6899 as correspondent.
6900
6901 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
6902 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
6903 regexp matching your mail addresses.
6904
6905 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
6906 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
6907 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
6908 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
6909 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
6910
6911 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
6912 like `j'.
6913
6914 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
6915 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
6916 digest message.
6917
6918 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
6919 in which folder to put messages automatically.
6920
6921 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
6922 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
6923 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
6924
6925 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
6926 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
6927
6928 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
6929 use the -f option when sending mail.
6930
6931 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
6932 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
6933 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
6934 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
6935 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
6936 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
6937
6938 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
6939 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
6940 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
6941
6942 ** Changes to TeX mode
6943
6944 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
6945 `latex-mode'.
6946
6947 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
6948
6949 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
6950
6951 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
6952
6953 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
6954
6955 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
6956 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
6957 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
6958 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
6959 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
6960 can be edited from that buffer.
6961
6962 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
6963 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
6964 `A' to use all marked entries).
6965
6966 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
6967 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
6968
6969 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
6970 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
6971 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
6972 been cited.
6973
6974 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
6975 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
6976 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
6977 in column 1 are always made leaves.
6978
6979 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
6980 has the following new features:
6981
6982 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
6983 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
6984 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
6985 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
6986
6987 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
6988 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
6989 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
6990 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
6991 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
6992 defaults to 1.
6993
6994 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
6995 file names.
6996
6997 ** Ispell changes
6998
6999 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
7000 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
7001 spell-checks the current buffer.
7002
7003 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
7004 added.
7005
7006 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
7007 correction is made and re-checked.
7008
7009 *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added.
7010
7011 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
7012 cases.
7013
7014 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
7015 on syntax errors.
7016
7017 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
7018 end of the buffer.
7019
7020 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
7021
7022 ** Makefile mode changes
7023
7024 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
7025
7026 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
7027 Fontlock mode is active.
7028
7029 ** Isearch changes
7030
7031 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
7032 so that searches can be resumed.
7033
7034 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
7035 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
7036 that started the search.
7037
7038 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
7039 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
7040
7041 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
7042
7043 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
7044 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
7045 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
7046 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
7047 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
7048 `secondary-selection'.
7049
7050 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
7051 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
7052 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
7053 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
7054 usual snappy response.
7055
7056 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
7057 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
7058 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
7059 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
7060
7061 ** VC Changes
7062
7063 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
7064 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
7065 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
7066 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
7067 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
7068 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
7069 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
7070 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
7071 file is registered in that backend.
7072
7073 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
7074 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
7075 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
7076 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
7077 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
7078 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
7079
7080 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
7081 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
7082 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
7083 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
7084 where it doesn't make sense.)
7085
7086 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
7087 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
7088 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
7089
7090 *** General Changes
7091
7092 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
7093 checks are always done now.
7094
7095 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
7096 operations.
7097
7098 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
7099 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
7100 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
7101
7102 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
7103 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
7104 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
7105 the working file (``merge news'').
7106
7107 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7108 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
7109 downwards.
7110
7111 *** Multiple Backends
7112
7113 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
7114 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
7115 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
7116 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
7117 local RCS archives.
7118
7119 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
7120 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
7121 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
7122 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
7123
7124 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
7125 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
7126 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
7127 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
7128 current revision number from the more remote backend.
7129
7130 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
7131 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
7132 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
7133 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
7134
7135 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
7136 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
7137 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
7138 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
7139
7140 *** Changes for CVS
7141
7142 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
7143 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
7144 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
7145 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
7146 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
7147 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
7148 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
7149
7150 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
7151 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
7152 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
7153 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
7154 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
7155 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
7156 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
7157 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
7158 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
7159 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
7160 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
7161 name.)
7162
7163 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
7164 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
7165 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
7166 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
7167 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
7168 entire directory tree.
7169
7170 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
7171 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
7172 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
7173 "watched" by other developers.)
7174
7175 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7176 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
7177 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
7178 starting at the given directory.
7179
7180 *** Lisp Changes in VC
7181
7182 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
7183 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
7184 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
7185 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
7186 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
7187 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
7188 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
7189 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
7190 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
7191
7192 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
7193 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
7194 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
7195 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
7196
7197 ** New modes and packages
7198
7199 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
7200 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
7201 the default is not applicable.
7202
7203 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
7204 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
7205 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
7206
7207 Features are:
7208
7209 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
7210 drawn, like this: | \ /
7211 --+-- X
7212 | / \
7213
7214 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
7215 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
7216 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
7217 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
7218 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
7219 you are drawing.
7220
7221 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
7222 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
7223
7224 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
7225 flood-filling.
7226
7227 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
7228 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
7229 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
7230 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
7231
7232 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
7233 also do without the mouse.
7234
7235 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
7236 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
7237 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
7238 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
7239 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
7240
7241 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
7242
7243 lines straight-lines
7244 rectangles squares
7245 poly-lines straight poly-lines
7246 ellipses circles
7247 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
7248 spray-can setting size for spraying
7249 vaporize line vaporize lines
7250 erase characters erase rectangles
7251
7252 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
7253 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
7254 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
7255 drawing.
7256
7257 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
7258 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
7259 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
7260 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
7261
7262 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
7263 can be turned off).
7264
7265 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
7266 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
7267 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
7268 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
7269 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
7270 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
7271 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
7272 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
7273 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
7274
7275 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
7276 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
7277 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
7278 on certain projects.
7279
7280 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
7281 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
7282
7283 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
7284
7285 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
7286 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
7287 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
7288 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
7289 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
7290 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
7291 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
7292 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
7293
7294 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
7295 Emacs is idle.
7296
7297 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
7298 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
7299
7300 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
7301 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
7302
7303 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
7304 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
7305 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
7306 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
7307 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
7308
7309 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
7310 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
7311 separate Texinfo file.
7312
7313 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
7314 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
7315 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
7316 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
7317 enter check-in log messages.
7318
7319 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
7320 without invoking external programs.
7321
7322 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
7323 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
7324 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
7325 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
7326 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
7327
7328 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
7329 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
7330
7331 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
7332 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
7333
7334 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
7335 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
7336 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
7337 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
7338 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
7339 single step.
7340
7341 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
7342 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
7343 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
7344 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
7345
7346 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
7347 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
7348 actually modifying content of a buffer.
7349
7350 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
7351 PostScript.
7352
7353 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
7354
7355 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
7356
7357 ; comment (until end of line)
7358 A non-terminal
7359 "C" terminal
7360 ?C? special
7361 $A default non-terminal
7362 $"C" default terminal
7363 $?C? default special
7364 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
7365 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
7366 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
7367 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
7368 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
7369 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
7370 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
7371 C+ one or more occurrences of C
7372 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
7373 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
7374 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
7375 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
7376 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
7377 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7378 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7379
7380 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
7381
7382 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7383 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7384 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7385 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7386 equal signs of assignments.
7387
7388 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
7389 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
7390
7391 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
7392 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
7393 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
7394
7395 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
7396
7397 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
7398 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
7399 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
7400 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
7401 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
7402 which answers different needs.
7403
7404 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
7405 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
7406 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
7407 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
7408 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
7409 to be enabled.
7410
7411 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
7412 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
7413
7414 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
7415
7416 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
7417 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
7418 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers.
7419
7420 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
7421
7422 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
7423 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
7424 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
7425 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
7426 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
7427 and background colors.
7428
7429 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
7430 Pascal) language.
7431
7432 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
7433 the text at point.
7434
7435 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
7436
7437 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
7438
7439 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
7440 whitespace in a file.
7441
7442 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
7443 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
7444 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
7445 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
7446 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
7447 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
7448 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
7449
7450 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
7451
7452 Here is an example of columns:
7453
7454 horse apple bus
7455 dog pineapple car EXTRA
7456 porcupine strawberry airplane
7457
7458 Doing the following settings:
7459
7460 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
7461 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
7462 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
7463 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
7464
7465
7466 Selecting the lines above and typing:
7467
7468 M-x delimit-columns-region
7469
7470 It results:
7471
7472 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
7473 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
7474 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
7475
7476 delim-col has the following options:
7477
7478 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
7479 before all columns.
7480
7481 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
7482 between each column.
7483
7484 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
7485 after all columns.
7486
7487 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
7488 each column.
7489
7490 delim-col has the following commands:
7491
7492 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
7493 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
7494
7495 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
7496 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
7497 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
7498 recent file list can be displayed:
7499
7500 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
7501 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
7502 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
7503
7504 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
7505 dynamically change the menu appearance.
7506
7507 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
7508 text.
7509
7510 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
7511 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
7512 specific to Message mode.
7513
7514 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
7515 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
7516 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
7517
7518 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
7519 interface to access directory servers using different directory
7520 protocols. It has a separate manual.
7521
7522 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
7523 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
7524
7525 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
7526
7527 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
7528 minibuffer with completion.
7529
7530 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
7531 with the diary features.
7532
7533 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
7534 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
7535
7536 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
7537 Fill mode.
7538
7539 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
7540 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
7541 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
7542 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
7543
7544 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
7545 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
7546 `.g'.
7547
7548 ** Changes in sort.el
7549
7550 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
7551 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
7552 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
7553 numeric base.
7554
7555 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
7556
7557 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
7558 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
7559 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
7560
7561 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
7562 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
7563
7564 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
7565 output ^M at the end of lines.
7566
7567 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
7568 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
7569
7570 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
7571 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
7572 `(msb-mode 1)'.
7573
7574 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
7575 group.
7576
7577 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
7578 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
7579 are recognized:
7580
7581 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
7582 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
7583 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
7584 nil -- just delete one character.
7585
7586 Default value is `untabify'.
7587
7588 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
7589
7590 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
7591 symbol, not double-quoted.
7592
7593 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
7594 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
7595 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
7596 moved to lisp/obsolete.
7597
7598 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
7599 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
7600 `auto-compression-mode' command.
7601
7602 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
7603 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
7604 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
7605
7606 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
7607 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
7608
7609 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
7610 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
7611
7612 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
7613 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
7614
7615 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
7616 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
7617 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
7618 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
7619 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
7620 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
7621
7622 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
7623 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
7624
7625 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
7626
7627 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
7628 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
7629
7630 ** Shell script mode changes.
7631
7632 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
7633 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
7634 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
7635
7636 ** Etags changes.
7637
7638 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
7639
7640 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
7641 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
7642 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
7643 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
7644 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
7645
7646 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
7647 declarations when given the --declarations option.
7648
7649 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
7650 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
7651
7652 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
7653 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
7654 `template' keywords.
7655
7656 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
7657 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
7658
7659 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
7660 types.
7661
7662 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
7663
7664 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
7665
7666 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
7667 are now tagged.
7668
7669 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
7670
7671 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
7672 variables are tagged.
7673
7674 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
7675
7676 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
7677 for PSWrap.
7678
7679 ** Changes in etags.el
7680
7681 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
7682 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
7683 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
7684
7685 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
7686 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
7687
7688 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
7689 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
7690 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
7691 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
7692
7693 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
7694
7695 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
7696 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
7697
7698 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
7699
7700 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
7701 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
7702 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
7703
7704 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
7705 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
7706
7707 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
7708 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
7709
7710 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
7711 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
7712 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
7713 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
7714 point will go to the beginning of the file.
7715
7716 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
7717 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
7718 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
7719
7720 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
7721 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
7722 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
7723
7724 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
7725 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
7726 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
7727
7728 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
7729
7730 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
7731
7732 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
7733 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
7734 expression from that list, are not checked.
7735
7736 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
7737 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
7738 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
7739 the buffer, just like for the local files.
7740
7741 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
7742
7743 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
7744 displays local abbrevs, only.
7745
7746 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
7747 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
7748
7749 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
7750 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
7751 is measured in pixels.
7752
7753 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
7754 to be visited as images.
7755
7756 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
7757 were added to compile.el.
7758
7759 ** Withdrawn packages
7760
7761 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
7762 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
7763
7764 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
7765
7766 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
7767
7768 \f
7769 * Incompatible Lisp changes
7770
7771 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
7772 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
7773 See the sections below for details.
7774
7775 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
7776 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
7777 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
7778 to remove the properties of the copy.
7779
7780 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
7781 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
7782 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
7783 these properties are active.
7784
7785 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
7786 ranges may affect some code.
7787
7788 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
7789 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
7790 make a difference to some code.
7791
7792 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
7793 operates on the minibuffer.
7794
7795 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
7796 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
7797 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
7798 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
7799 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
7800 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
7801 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
7802 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
7803 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
7804 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
7805 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
7806 the buffer as multibyte characters.
7807
7808 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
7809 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
7810 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
7811
7812 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
7813 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
7814 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7815
7816 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
7817 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat',
7818 such as `mapconcat'.
7819
7820 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
7821 string.
7822
7823 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
7824 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
7825 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
7826 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
7827 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
7828 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
7829 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
7830 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
7831
7832 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
7833 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
7834 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
7835 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
7836 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
7837 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
7838 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
7839 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
7840 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
7841 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
7842
7843 \f
7844 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
7845 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
7846
7847 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
7848
7849 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
7850 allows the animated display of strings.
7851
7852 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
7853 interactive form of a function.
7854
7855 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
7856 between custom options. Example:
7857
7858 (defcustom default-input-method nil
7859 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
7860 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
7861 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
7862 :group 'mule
7863 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
7864 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
7865
7866 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
7867 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
7868 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
7869
7870 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
7871 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
7872 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
7873 (signal or normal termination).
7874
7875 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
7876 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
7877
7878 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
7879 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
7880
7881 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
7882 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
7883
7884 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
7885
7886 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
7887 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
7888 being deleted.
7889
7890 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
7891
7892 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
7893 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
7894 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
7895 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
7896 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
7897 charset.
7898
7899 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
7900 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
7901 message.
7902
7903 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
7904 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
7905
7906 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
7907 with the more general `:mask' property.
7908
7909 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
7910
7911 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
7912 backslash.
7913
7914 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
7915 is running in batch mode. For example,
7916
7917 (message "%s" (read t))
7918
7919 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
7920 to standard output.
7921
7922 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
7923 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
7924
7925 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
7926 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
7927 frame or window.
7928
7929 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
7930 were added
7931
7932 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
7933
7934 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
7935 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
7936
7937 - Function: remq ELT LIST
7938
7939 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
7940 comparison is done with `eq'.
7941
7942 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
7943
7944 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
7945 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
7946 `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
7947
7948 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
7949 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
7950 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
7951
7952 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
7953 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
7954
7955 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
7956 function was declared obsolete.
7957
7958 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7959 retained as an alias).
7960
7961 ** Easy-menu's :filter now takes the unconverted form of the menu and
7962 the result is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
7963
7964 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
7965
7966 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
7967
7968 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
7969 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
7970 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
7971 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
7972 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
7973 means never include the minibuffer window.
7974
7975 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
7976
7977 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
7978
7979 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
7980
7981 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
7982 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
7983 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
7984 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
7985 returned.
7986
7987 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
7988 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
7989 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
7990 minibuffer even if it is active.
7991
7992 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
7993 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
7994 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
7995 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
7996 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
7997 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
7998
7999 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
8000 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
8001 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
8002 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
8003 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
8004 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
8005 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
8006
8007 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
8008 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
8009 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
8010
8011 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
8012 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
8013 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
8014 Default value is nil.
8015
8016 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
8017 meaning no limit.
8018
8019 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
8020 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
8021 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
8022
8023 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
8024 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
8025 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
8026
8027 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
8028 list of a primitive.
8029
8030 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
8031
8032 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
8033 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
8034 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
8035 than replacing the local map.
8036
8037 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
8038 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
8039 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
8040 instead.
8041
8042 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
8043
8044 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
8045 as promised long ago.
8046
8047 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
8048
8049 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
8050 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
8051 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
8052
8053 \f
8054 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
8055
8056 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
8057 regular expressions.
8058
8059 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
8060
8061 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8062
8063 - Macro: rx SEXP
8064
8065 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8066
8067 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
8068 notation.
8069
8070 STRING
8071 matches string STRING literally.
8072
8073 CHAR
8074 matches character CHAR literally.
8075
8076 `not-newline'
8077 matches any character except a newline.
8078 .
8079 `anything'
8080 matches any character
8081
8082 `(any SET)'
8083 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
8084 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
8085
8086 '(in SET)'
8087 like `any'.
8088
8089 `(not (any SET))'
8090 matches any character not in SET
8091
8092 `line-start'
8093 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
8094 in the text being matched
8095
8096 `line-end'
8097 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
8098
8099 `string-start'
8100 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8101 string being matched against.
8102
8103 `string-end'
8104 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8105 string being matched against.
8106
8107 `buffer-start'
8108 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8109 buffer being matched against.
8110
8111 `buffer-end'
8112 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8113 buffer being matched against.
8114
8115 `point'
8116 matches the empty string, but only at point.
8117
8118 `word-start'
8119 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8120 word.
8121
8122 `word-end'
8123 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
8124
8125 `word-boundary'
8126 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8127 word.
8128
8129 `(not word-boundary)'
8130 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
8131 word.
8132
8133 `digit'
8134 matches 0 through 9.
8135
8136 `control'
8137 matches ASCII control characters.
8138
8139 `hex-digit'
8140 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8141
8142 `blank'
8143 matches space and tab only.
8144
8145 `graphic'
8146 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8147 space, and DEL.
8148
8149 `printing'
8150 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8151 and DEL.
8152
8153 `alphanumeric'
8154 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8155 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8156
8157 `letter'
8158 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8159 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8160
8161 `ascii'
8162 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8163
8164 `nonascii'
8165 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8166
8167 `lower'
8168 matches anything lower-case.
8169
8170 `upper'
8171 matches anything upper-case.
8172
8173 `punctuation'
8174 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8175 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8176
8177 `space'
8178 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8179
8180 `word'
8181 matches anything that has word syntax.
8182
8183 `(syntax SYNTAX)'
8184 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
8185 of the following symbols.
8186
8187 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
8188 `punctuation' (\\s.)
8189 `word' (\\sw)
8190 `symbol' (\\s_)
8191 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
8192 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
8193 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
8194 `string-quote' (\\s\")
8195 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
8196 `escape' (\\s\\)
8197 `character-quote' (\\s/)
8198 `comment-start' (\\s<)
8199 `comment-end' (\\s>)
8200
8201 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
8202 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
8203
8204 `(category CATEGORY)'
8205 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
8206 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
8207
8208 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
8209 `base-vowel' (\\c1)
8210 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
8211 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
8212 `tone-mark' (\\c4)
8213 `symbol' (\\c5)
8214 `digit' (\\c6)
8215 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
8216 `vowel-sign' (\\c8)
8217 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
8218 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
8219 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
8220 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
8221 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
8222 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
8223 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
8224 `indian-two-byte' (\\cI)
8225 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
8226 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
8227 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
8228 `ascii' (\\ca)
8229 `arabic' (\\cb)
8230 `chinese' (\\cc)
8231 `ethiopic' (\\ce)
8232 `greek' (\\cg)
8233 `korean' (\\ch)
8234 `indian' (\\ci)
8235 `japanese' (\\cj)
8236 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
8237 `latin' (\\cl)
8238 `lao' (\\co)
8239 `tibetan' (\\cq)
8240 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
8241 `thai' (\\ct)
8242 `vietnamese' (\\cv)
8243 `hebrew' (\\cw)
8244 `cyrillic' (\\cy)
8245 `can-break' (\\c|)
8246
8247 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
8248 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
8249
8250 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8251 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
8252
8253 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8254 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
8255 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
8256
8257 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8258 another name for `submatch'.
8259
8260 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8261 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
8262 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
8263 regular expression.
8264
8265 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
8266 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
8267 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
8268 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
8269 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
8270
8271 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
8272 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
8273
8274 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
8275 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8276
8277 `(0+ SEXP)'
8278 like `zero-or-more'.
8279
8280 `(* SEXP)'
8281 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8282
8283 `(*? SEXP)'
8284 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8285
8286 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
8287 matches one or more occurrences of A.
8288
8289 `(1+ SEXP)'
8290 like `one-or-more'.
8291
8292 `(+ SEXP)'
8293 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8294
8295 `(+? SEXP)'
8296 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8297
8298 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
8299 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
8300
8301 `(optional SEXP)'
8302 like `zero-or-one'.
8303
8304 `(? SEXP)'
8305 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8306
8307 `(?? SEXP)'
8308 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8309
8310 `(repeat N SEXP)'
8311 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8312
8313 `(repeat N M SEXP)'
8314 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8315
8316 `(eval FORM)'
8317 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
8318 `regexp-quote' it.
8319
8320 `(regexp REGEXP)'
8321 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
8322
8323 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
8324
8325 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
8326 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
8327 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
8328 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
8329
8330 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
8331 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
8332 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
8333 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
8334
8335 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
8336 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
8337 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
8338
8339 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
8340 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
8341 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
8342 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
8343 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
8344 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
8345 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
8346 eight-bit-graphic.
8347
8348 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
8349
8350 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
8351 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
8352 character set as previously.
8353
8354 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
8355 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
8356 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
8357
8358 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
8359 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
8360 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
8361 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
8362
8363 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
8364 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
8365
8366 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
8367 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
8368 "fontset-default".
8369
8370 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
8371 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
8372
8373 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
8374 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
8375 buffers and strings.
8376
8377 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
8378 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
8379 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
8380 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
8381 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
8382 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
8383 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
8384 also been deleted.
8385
8386 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
8387 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
8388 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
8389
8390 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
8391 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
8392 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
8393 may differ between buffer and string text.
8394
8395 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
8396 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
8397
8398 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
8399 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
8400 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
8401 `composition' from STRING.
8402
8403 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
8404 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
8405
8406 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
8407 obsolete.
8408
8409 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
8410 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
8411
8412 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
8413 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
8414 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
8415 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
8416
8417 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
8418 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
8419 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
8420 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
8421 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
8422 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
8423
8424 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
8425 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
8426 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
8427
8428 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
8429 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
8430 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
8431
8432 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
8433 have been introduced.
8434
8435 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
8436 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
8437 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
8438 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
8439 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
8440 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
8441 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
8442 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
8443 their multibyte equivalent.
8444
8445 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
8446 that offset in the file before writing.
8447
8448 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
8449 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
8450
8451 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
8452 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
8453 from which the command was issued.
8454
8455 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
8456 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
8457 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
8458 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
8459 operate on.
8460
8461 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
8462 to `window-buffer-height'.
8463
8464 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
8465
8466 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
8467 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
8468 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
8469
8470 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
8471 respectively.
8472
8473 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
8474 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
8475
8476 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
8477 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
8478 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
8479
8480 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
8481 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
8482 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
8483 is currently displayed in some window.
8484
8485 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
8486 argument function's results.
8487
8488 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
8489 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
8490 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
8491 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
8492 sequence).
8493
8494 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
8495 header in the list of headers passed to it.
8496
8497 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
8498 ignores differences in case and text representation.
8499
8500 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
8501 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
8502 as follows:
8503
8504 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
8505 nil don't display a cursor
8506 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
8507 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
8508 others display a box cursor.
8509
8510 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
8511 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
8512 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
8513 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
8514
8515 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
8516 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
8517 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
8518 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
8519
8520 Example:
8521
8522 (string-to-syntax "()")
8523 => (4 . 41)
8524
8525 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
8526 other than 10.
8527
8528 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
8529 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
8530
8531 #b1111
8532 => 15
8533 #b-1111
8534 => -15
8535
8536 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
8537
8538 #o666
8539 => 438
8540
8541 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
8542
8543 #xbeef
8544 => 48815
8545
8546 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
8547
8548 #2R-111
8549 => -7
8550 #25rah
8551 => 267
8552
8553 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
8554 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
8555 and isn't a string.
8556
8557 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
8558 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
8559 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
8560 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
8561
8562 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
8563
8564 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
8565 for a regexp in a string.
8566
8567 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
8568 `mouse-position-function'.
8569
8570 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
8571 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
8572
8573 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
8574 Keywords are now always considered constants.
8575
8576 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
8577 returns it.
8578
8579 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
8580 returned by function `recent-keys'.
8581
8582 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
8583 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
8584 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
8585 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
8586 mode.
8587
8588 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
8589 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
8590
8591 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
8592 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
8593 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
8594 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
8595 been performed."
8596
8597 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
8598 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
8599 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
8600 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
8601
8602 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
8603 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
8604 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
8605
8606 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
8607 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
8608 specified table.
8609
8610 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
8611
8612 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
8613 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
8614 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
8615 what BODY returns.
8616
8617 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
8618 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8619 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
8620 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
8621 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8622
8623 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
8624 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
8625
8626 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
8627 instead of being optional.
8628
8629 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
8630 modify read-only text.
8631
8632 ** New functions and variables for locales.
8633
8634 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
8635 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
8636 time functions like strftime. The new variables
8637 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
8638 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
8639
8640 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
8641 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
8642 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
8643 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
8644 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
8645 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
8646 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
8647
8648 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
8649 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
8650 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
8651 start sequences.
8652
8653 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
8654 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
8655
8656 ** New function `propertize'
8657
8658 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
8659 strings with text properties.
8660
8661 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
8662
8663 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
8664 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
8665 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
8666 specified value of that property. Example:
8667
8668 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
8669
8670 ** push and pop macros.
8671
8672 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
8673 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
8674 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
8675
8676 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
8677 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
8678 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
8679
8680 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
8681
8682 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
8683 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
8684
8685 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
8686 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
8687 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
8688 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8689
8690 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
8691 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
8692 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
8693 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8694
8695 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
8696 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
8697 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
8698 or a sign.
8699
8700 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
8701 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
8702 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8703 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
8704 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8705 space, and DEL.
8706 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8707 and DEL.
8708 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
8709 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8710 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8711 [:alpha:] matches letters.
8712 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8713 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8714 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8715 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8716 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
8717 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
8718 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8719 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8720 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8721 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
8722 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
8723
8724 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
8725
8726 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
8727
8728 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
8729
8730 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
8731 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
8732
8733 :test TEST
8734
8735 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
8736 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
8737 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
8738
8739 :size SIZE
8740
8741 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
8742 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
8743
8744 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
8745
8746 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
8747 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
8748 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
8749 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
8750 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
8751
8752 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
8753
8754 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
8755 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
8756 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
8757
8758 :weakness WEAK
8759
8760 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
8761 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
8762 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
8763 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
8764 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
8765
8766 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
8767
8768 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
8769
8770 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
8771
8772 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
8773
8774 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
8775
8776 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
8777 values are shared.
8778
8779 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
8780
8781 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
8782
8783 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8784
8785 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
8786
8787 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
8788
8789 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
8790
8791 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8792
8793 Returns the size of TABLE.
8794
8795 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
8796
8797 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
8798
8799 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
8800
8801 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
8802
8803 - Function: clrhash TABLE
8804
8805 Clear TABLE.
8806
8807 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
8808
8809 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
8810 not found.
8811
8812 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
8813
8814 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
8815 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
8816
8817 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
8818
8819 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
8820
8821 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
8822
8823 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
8824 arguments KEY and VALUE.
8825
8826 - Function: sxhash OBJ
8827
8828 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
8829
8830 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
8831
8832 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
8833 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
8834 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
8835 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
8836 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
8837
8838 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
8839
8840 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
8841 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
8842 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
8843
8844 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
8845 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
8846
8847 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
8848 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
8849
8850 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
8851 (sxhash (upcase a)))
8852
8853 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
8854 'case-fold-string-hash))
8855
8856 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
8857
8858 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
8859
8860 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
8861 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
8862 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
8863
8864 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
8865
8866 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
8867 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
8868
8869 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
8870 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
8871 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
8872 is too short to reach that column.
8873
8874 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
8875 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
8876 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
8877 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
8878
8879 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
8880 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
8881 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
8882
8883 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
8884 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
8885
8886 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
8887 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
8888
8889 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
8890 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
8891 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
8892 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
8893 temporary-file-directory instead.
8894
8895 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
8896 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
8897 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
8898 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
8899
8900 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
8901 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
8902
8903 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
8904
8905 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
8906 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
8907 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
8908
8909 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
8910
8911 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
8912 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
8913 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
8914 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
8915 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
8916 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
8917
8918 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
8919 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
8920 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
8921 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
8922
8923 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
8924
8925 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
8926 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
8927 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
8928 result string.
8929
8930 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
8931 string where arguments appear in the result string.
8932
8933 Example:
8934
8935 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
8936 (s2 "world"))
8937 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
8938 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
8939 (format s1 s2))
8940
8941 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
8942
8943 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
8944
8945 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
8946 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
8947 argument in it.
8948
8949 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
8950 (arg "world"))
8951 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
8952 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
8953 (message msg arg))
8954
8955 ** Sound support
8956
8957 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
8958 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
8959
8960 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
8961 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
8962 to enable sound support.
8963
8964 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
8965 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
8966 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
8967 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
8968 sound to play, before playing the sound.
8969
8970 The following sound properties are supported:
8971
8972 - `:file FILE'
8973
8974 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
8975 searched relative to `data-directory'.
8976
8977 - `:data DATA'
8978
8979 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
8980 may be present, but not both.
8981
8982 - `:volume VOLUME'
8983
8984 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
8985 0..1. This property is optional.
8986
8987 - `:device DEVICE'
8988
8989 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
8990 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
8991
8992 Other properties are ignored.
8993
8994 An alternative interface is called as
8995 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
8996
8997 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
8998
8999 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
9000 a keyword symbol.
9001
9002 ** Changes to garbage collection
9003
9004 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
9005 of live and free strings.
9006
9007 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
9008 strings that have been consed so far.
9009
9010 \f
9011 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
9012 Lisp Manual
9013
9014 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
9015 mini-windows.
9016
9017 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
9018 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
9019 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
9020
9021 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
9022
9023 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
9024
9025 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
9026 image.
9027
9028 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
9029
9030 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
9031
9032 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
9033 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
9034 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
9035 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
9036 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
9037
9038 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
9039 has a mask bitmap.
9040
9041 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
9042
9043 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
9044 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
9045 or omitted means use the selected frame.
9046
9047 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
9048 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
9049
9050 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
9051 optional.
9052
9053 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
9054 below).
9055
9056 \f
9057 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
9058
9059 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
9060 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
9061
9062 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
9063 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
9064 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
9065 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
9066 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
9067 just display it black instead.
9068
9069 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
9070 a line like
9071
9072 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
9073
9074 in your `.emacs'.
9075
9076 ** New face implementation.
9077
9078 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
9079 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
9080
9081 *** New faces.
9082
9083 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
9084
9085 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
9086
9087 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
9088 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
9089
9090 3. Font height in 1/10pt
9091
9092 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
9093
9094 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
9095
9096 6. Foreground color.
9097
9098 7. Background color.
9099
9100 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
9101
9102 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
9103
9104 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
9105
9106 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
9107
9108 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
9109 color.
9110
9111 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
9112 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
9113
9114 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
9115 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
9116 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
9117 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
9118 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
9119 attributes mentioned above.
9120
9121 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
9122 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
9123 created frames.
9124
9125 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
9126 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
9127 `fully-specified'.
9128
9129 *** Face merging.
9130
9131 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
9132 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
9133 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
9134 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
9135 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
9136 results in a fully-specified face.
9137
9138 *** Face realization.
9139
9140 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
9141 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
9142 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
9143 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
9144 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
9145 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
9146
9147 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
9148 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
9149 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
9150 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
9151
9152 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
9153 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
9154 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
9155 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
9156 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
9157
9158 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
9159 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
9160 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
9161 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
9162 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
9163 Emacs.
9164
9165 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
9166 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
9167 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
9168 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
9169
9170 **** Clearing face caches.
9171
9172 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
9173 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
9174 unused fonts.
9175
9176 *** Font selection.
9177
9178 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
9179 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
9180 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
9181
9182 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
9183 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
9184 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
9185 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
9186 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
9187
9188 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
9189 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
9190 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
9191
9192 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
9193
9194 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
9195 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
9196 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
9197 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
9198 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
9199 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
9200 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
9201
9202 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9203 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
9204 doesn't exist.
9205
9206 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9207 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
9208 registry.
9209
9210 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
9211 slightly different.
9212
9213 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
9214
9215
9216 **** Scalable fonts
9217
9218 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
9219 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
9220 servers.
9221
9222 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
9223 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
9224 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
9225 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
9226 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
9227 that list. Example:
9228
9229 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
9230
9231 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
9232
9233 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
9234
9235 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
9236
9237 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
9238 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
9239 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
9240
9241 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
9242 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
9243 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
9244 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
9245 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
9246 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
9247 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
9248 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
9249 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
9250 of the face font sort order.
9251
9252 - Function: x-font-family-list
9253
9254 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
9255 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
9256 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
9257 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
9258
9259 - Variable: font-list-limit
9260
9261 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
9262 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
9263 matching font. The default is currently 100.
9264
9265 *** Setting face attributes.
9266
9267 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
9268 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
9269 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
9270 `face-attribute'.
9271
9272 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
9273 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
9274
9275 The following attributes are recognized:
9276
9277 `:family'
9278
9279 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
9280 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
9281 and `?' are allowed.
9282
9283 `:width'
9284
9285 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
9286 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
9287 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
9288 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
9289
9290 `:height'
9291
9292 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
9293 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
9294 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
9295 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
9296
9297 `:weight'
9298
9299 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
9300 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
9301 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
9302
9303 `:slant'
9304
9305 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
9306 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
9307 `reverse-oblique'.
9308
9309 `:foreground', `:background'
9310
9311 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
9312
9313 `:underline'
9314
9315 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
9316 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
9317 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
9318 don't underline.
9319
9320 `:overline'
9321
9322 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
9323 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
9324 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
9325 overline.
9326
9327 `:strike-through'
9328
9329 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
9330 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
9331 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
9332 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
9333
9334 `:box'
9335
9336 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
9337 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
9338 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
9339 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
9340 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
9341 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
9342 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
9343 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
9344 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
9345 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
9346 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
9347 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
9348 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
9349 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
9350 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
9351 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
9352 box.
9353
9354 `:inverse-video'
9355
9356 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
9357 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
9358
9359 `:stipple'
9360
9361 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
9362 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
9363 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
9364 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
9365 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
9366 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
9367
9368 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
9369 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
9370
9371 `:font'
9372
9373 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
9374 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
9375 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
9376 versions of Emacs.
9377
9378 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
9379 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
9380 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
9381
9382 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
9383 `defface'.
9384
9385 `:inherit'
9386
9387 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
9388 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
9389 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
9390
9391 *** Face attributes and X resources
9392
9393 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
9394 from X resources:
9395
9396 Face attribute X resource class
9397 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
9398 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
9399 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
9400 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
9401 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
9402 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
9403 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
9404 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
9405 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
9406 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
9407 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
9408 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
9409 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
9410 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
9411 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
9412 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
9413 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9414 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
9415 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
9416 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9417
9418 *** Text property `face'.
9419
9420 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
9421 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
9422 specification can be
9423
9424 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
9425
9426 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
9427 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
9428 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
9429 for face attribute names.
9430
9431 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
9432 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
9433 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
9434
9435 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
9436
9437 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
9438 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
9439 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
9440 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
9441 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
9442 used to clear the mapping table.
9443
9444 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
9445
9446 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
9447 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
9448 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
9449 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
9450 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
9451 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
9452 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
9453 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
9454 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
9455 modify their color-related behavior.
9456
9457 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
9458 any frame type.
9459
9460 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
9461
9462 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
9463 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
9464 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
9465 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
9466 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
9467 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
9468 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
9469 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
9470 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
9471
9472 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
9473 display can display image files.
9474
9475 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
9476
9477 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
9478 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
9479 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
9480 `Inviolable' option.
9481
9482 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the
9483 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
9484 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'.
9485
9486 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
9487
9488 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
9489 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
9490 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
9491
9492 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
9493 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9494 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
9495 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
9496 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
9497 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
9498 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
9499 functions.
9500
9501 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9502 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
9503 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
9504
9505 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
9506
9507 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9508
9509 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
9510
9511 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9512 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9513 constrained position if that is different.
9514
9515 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
9516 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
9517 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
9518 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9519 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9520 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
9521 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
9522 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
9523 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9524
9525 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
9526 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
9527 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
9528 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
9529 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
9530
9531 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
9532 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
9533
9534 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
9535
9536 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
9537
9538 Delete the field surrounding POS.
9539 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9540 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9541
9542 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9543
9544 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
9545 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9546 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9547 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9548 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
9549
9550 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9551
9552 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
9553 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9554 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9555 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9556 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
9557
9558 - Function: field-string &optional POS
9559
9560 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
9561 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9562 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9563
9564 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
9565
9566 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
9567 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9568 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9569
9570 ** Image support.
9571
9572 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
9573 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
9574 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
9575 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
9576
9577 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
9578 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
9579 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
9580 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
9581 area.
9582
9583 IMAGE is an image specification.
9584
9585 *** Image specifications
9586
9587 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
9588 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
9589 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
9590 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
9591 described below are ignored.
9592
9593 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
9594
9595 `:ascent ASCENT'
9596
9597 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
9598 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
9599 to use for its ascent.
9600
9601 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
9602 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
9603
9604 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
9605 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
9606 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
9607 overlays that apply to the image.
9608
9609 `:margin MARGIN'
9610
9611 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
9612 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
9613 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
9614
9615 `:relief RELIEF'
9616
9617 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
9618 around an image.
9619
9620 `:conversion ALGO'
9621
9622 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
9623
9624 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
9625 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
9626
9627 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
9628 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
9629 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
9630 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
9631 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
9632 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
9633 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
9634 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
9635 below.
9636
9637 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
9638 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
9639 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
9640
9641 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
9642 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
9643 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
9644 of the factors' absolute values.
9645
9646 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
9647
9648 (1 0 0
9649 0 0 0
9650 9 9 -1)
9651
9652 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
9653
9654 ( 2 -1 0
9655 -1 0 1
9656 0 1 -2)
9657
9658 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
9659 ``disabled''.
9660
9661 `:mask MASK'
9662
9663 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
9664 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
9665 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
9666 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
9667 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
9668 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
9669 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
9670 image.
9671
9672 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
9673 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
9674 `:mask nil'.
9675
9676 `:file FILE'
9677
9678 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
9679 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
9680 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
9681 may be present in the image specification.
9682
9683 `:data DATA'
9684
9685 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
9686 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
9687 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
9688 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
9689
9690 *** Supported image types
9691
9692 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
9693
9694 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
9695 properties supported are:
9696
9697 `:foreground FG'
9698
9699 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9700 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9701
9702 `:background BG'
9703
9704 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9705 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9706
9707 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
9708 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
9709 instead of a `:file' property.
9710
9711 `:width WIDTH'
9712
9713 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
9714
9715 `:height HEIGHT'
9716
9717 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
9718
9719 `:data DATA'
9720
9721 DATA must be either
9722
9723 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
9724 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
9725
9726 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
9727
9728 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
9729 bitmap.
9730
9731 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
9732 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
9733 in the file.
9734
9735 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
9736
9737 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
9738 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
9739 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
9740 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
9741
9742 Additional image properties supported are:
9743
9744 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
9745
9746 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
9747 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
9748 name.
9749
9750 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
9751 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
9752
9753 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
9754 to display compressed images.
9755
9756 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
9757
9758 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
9759 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
9760 mono images are:
9761
9762 `:foreground FG'
9763
9764 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9765 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9766
9767 `:background FG'
9768
9769 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9770 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9771
9772 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
9773
9774 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
9775 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9776 properties defined.
9777
9778 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
9779
9780 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
9781 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9782 properties defined.
9783
9784 **** GIF, image type `gif'
9785
9786 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
9787 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
9788
9789 Additional image properties supported are:
9790
9791 `:index INDEX'
9792
9793 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
9794 multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays
9795 as a hollow box.
9796
9797 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
9798 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
9799 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
9800 every 0.1 seconds.
9801
9802 (defun show-anim (file max)
9803 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
9804 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
9805
9806 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
9807 (when (= idx max)
9808 (setq idx 0))
9809 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
9810 (save-excursion
9811 (set-buffer buffer)
9812 (goto-char (point-min))
9813 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
9814 (insert-image img "x"))
9815 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
9816
9817 **** PNG, image type `png'
9818
9819 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
9820 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9821 properties defined.
9822
9823 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
9824
9825 Additional image properties supported are:
9826
9827 `:pt-width WIDTH'
9828
9829 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
9830 integer. This is a required property.
9831
9832 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
9833
9834 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
9835 must be a integer. This is an required property.
9836
9837 `:bounding-box BOX'
9838
9839 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
9840 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
9841 files. This is an required property.
9842
9843 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
9844 lisp/gs.el.
9845
9846 *** Lisp interface.
9847
9848 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
9849 which are supported in the current configuration.
9850
9851 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
9852 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
9853 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
9854 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
9855 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
9856
9857 *** Simplified image API, image.el
9858
9859 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
9860 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
9861 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
9862 define an image based on available image types. The functions
9863 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
9864 buffer.
9865
9866 ** Display margins.
9867
9868 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
9869 and images.
9870
9871 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
9872 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
9873 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
9874 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
9875 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
9876 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
9877 of the display margins.
9878
9879 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
9880 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
9881 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
9882 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
9883 in this file).
9884
9885 ** Help display
9886
9887 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
9888 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
9889 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
9890 that have a `help-echo' property.
9891
9892 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
9893 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
9894 the window in which the help was found.
9895
9896 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
9897 `help-echo' text property was found.
9898
9899 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
9900 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
9901
9902 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
9903 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
9904 mouse.
9905
9906 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
9907 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
9908
9909 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
9910 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
9911 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
9912 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
9913 used as help string.
9914
9915 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
9916 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
9917 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
9918
9919 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
9920
9921 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
9922 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
9923
9924 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
9925 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
9926 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
9927 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
9928 used.
9929
9930 (global-set-key [A-down]
9931 #'(lambda ()
9932 (interactive)
9933 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
9934 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
9935 (global-set-key [A-up]
9936 #'(lambda ()
9937 (interactive)
9938 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
9939 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
9940
9941 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
9942
9943 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
9944 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
9945 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
9946 is called with one argument, POS.
9947
9948 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
9949 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
9950 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
9951 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
9952 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
9953
9954 ** Tool bar support.
9955
9956 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
9957 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
9958 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
9959 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
9960 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
9961 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
9962
9963 *** Tool bar item definitions
9964
9965 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
9966 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
9967 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
9968
9969 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
9970 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
9971 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
9972 property (see below).
9973
9974 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
9975 binding are currently ignored.
9976
9977 The following properties are recognized:
9978
9979 `:enable FORM'.
9980
9981 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
9982 or disabled.
9983
9984 `:visible FORM'
9985
9986 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
9987
9988 `:filter FUNCTION'
9989
9990 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
9991 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
9992 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
9993
9994 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
9995
9996 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
9997 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
9998
9999 `:image IMAGES'
10000
10001 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
10002 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
10003 meaning of each of the four elements:
10004
10005 Index Use when item is
10006 ----------------------------------------
10007 0 enabled and selected
10008 1 enabled and deselected
10009 2 disabled and selected
10010 3 disabled and deselected
10011
10012 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
10013 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
10014
10015 `:help HELP-STRING'.
10016
10017 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
10018 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
10019
10020 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
10021 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
10022 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
10023 menu bar.
10024
10025 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
10026 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
10027 buffer-locally to override the global map.
10028
10029 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
10030
10031 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
10032 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
10033 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
10034
10035 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
10036 raised when the mouse moves over them.
10037
10038 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
10039 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
10040 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
10041 vertical margins . Default is 1.
10042
10043 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
10044 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
10045
10046 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
10047
10048 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
10049 a tool bar item. If
10050
10051 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
10052 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
10053 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
10054
10055 is the original tool bar item definition, then
10056
10057 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
10058
10059 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
10060 item.
10061
10062 ** Mode line changes.
10063
10064 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
10065
10066 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
10067 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
10068 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
10069
10070 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
10071 a `local-map' text property.
10072
10073 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
10074 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
10075
10076 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
10077 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
10078 `local-map' property.
10079
10080 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
10081 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
10082 example.
10083
10084 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
10085 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
10086
10087 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
10088 variable mode-line-format to nil.
10089
10090 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
10091
10092 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
10093 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
10094 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
10095 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
10096 line.
10097
10098 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
10099 `header-line'.
10100
10101 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
10102 position in the header-line.
10103
10104 ** Text property `display'
10105
10106 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
10107 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
10108 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
10109 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
10110 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
10111
10112 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
10113
10114 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
10115 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
10116
10117 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
10118 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
10119 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
10120 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10121 simpler form STRING as property value.
10122
10123 *** Variable width and height spaces
10124
10125 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
10126 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
10127 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
10128 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
10129 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
10130 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10131 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
10132
10133 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
10134 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
10135 properties described below.
10136
10137 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
10138 characters having the `display' property.
10139
10140 - :width WIDTH
10141
10142 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
10143 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
10144
10145 - :relative-width FACTOR
10146
10147 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
10148 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
10149 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
10150 width of that character by FACTOR.
10151
10152 - :align-to HPOS
10153
10154 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
10155 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
10156
10157 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
10158
10159 - :height HEIGHT
10160
10161 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
10162 normal line height.
10163
10164 - :relative-height FACTOR
10165
10166 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
10167 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
10168
10169 - :ascent ASCENT
10170
10171 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
10172 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
10173 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
10174 equal to 100.
10175
10176 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
10177
10178 *** Images
10179
10180 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
10181 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
10182 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
10183 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
10184 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
10185 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
10186 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
10187 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
10188 as display specification.
10189
10190 *** Other display properties
10191
10192 - (space-width FACTOR)
10193
10194 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
10195 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
10196 integer or float.
10197
10198 - (height HEIGHT)
10199
10200 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
10201
10202 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
10203 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
10204 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
10205 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
10206 a font is available counts as a step.
10207
10208 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
10209 as tall as the frame's default font.
10210
10211 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
10212 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
10213
10214 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
10215 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
10216
10217 - (raise FACTOR)
10218
10219 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
10220 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
10221 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
10222 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
10223 `height' subproperty.
10224
10225 *** Conditional display properties
10226
10227 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
10228 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
10229 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
10230 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
10231 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
10232 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
10233 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
10234 different when object is a string.
10235
10236 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
10237 `(when t . SPEC)'.
10238
10239 ** New menu separator types.
10240
10241 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
10242 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
10243 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
10244 to specify other menu separator types.
10245
10246 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
10247
10248 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
10249 separator occurs.
10250
10251 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
10252
10253 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
10254
10255 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
10256
10257 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
10258
10259 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
10260
10261 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10262
10263 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
10264
10265 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10266
10267 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
10268
10269 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
10270 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
10271
10272 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
10273
10274 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
10275
10276 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
10277
10278 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
10279
10280 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
10281
10282 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
10283
10284 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
10285
10286 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10287
10288 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
10289
10290 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
10291
10292 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
10293
10294 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10295
10296 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
10297
10298 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
10299
10300 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
10301 the corresponding single-line separators.
10302
10303 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
10304
10305 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
10306 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
10307 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
10308 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
10309 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
10310 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
10311 default foreground is black.
10312
10313 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
10314 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
10315 `ScrollBarBackground').
10316
10317 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
10318 settings for scroll bar colors.
10319
10320 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
10321 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
10322
10323 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
10324 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
10325 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
10326 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
10327 the original window start.
10328
10329 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
10330 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
10331 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
10332
10333 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
10334
10335 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
10336 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
10337 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
10338 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
10339
10340 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
10341 fixed-width and fixed-height.
10342
10343 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
10344
10345 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
10346 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
10347 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
10348 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
10349 temporarily to nil, for example
10350
10351 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
10352 (enlarge-window 10))
10353
10354 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
10355 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
10356
10357 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
10358 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
10359 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
10360 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
10361 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
10362 support a vertical-bar cursor).
10363
10364
10365 \f
10366 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
10367
10368 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
10369 input.
10370
10371 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
10372
10373 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
10374
10375 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
10376 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
10377 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
10378 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
10379 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
10380
10381 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
10382 been added.
10383
10384 \f
10385 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
10386
10387 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
10388
10389
10390 \f
10391 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
10392
10393 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
10394 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
10395 \f
10396 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
10397
10398 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
10399
10400 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
10401 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
10402 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
10403
10404 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
10405 is the one that is used.
10406
10407 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
10408 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
10409 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
10410 separate from the command's regular output.
10411 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
10412 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
10413 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
10414 the buffer name.
10415
10416 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
10417 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
10418 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
10419 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
10420
10421 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
10422 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
10423 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
10424 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
10425
10426 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
10427 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
10428 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
10429 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
10430
10431 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
10432 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
10433 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
10434 they never ignore case.
10435
10436 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
10437 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
10438 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
10439 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
10440 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
10441 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
10442 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
10443
10444 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
10445 the same format that was used in the file before.
10446
10447 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
10448 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
10449
10450 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
10451 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
10452 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
10453
10454 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
10455 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
10456 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
10457 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
10458 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
10459 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
10460 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
10461
10462 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
10463 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
10464 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
10465 format. You can now customize these variables.
10466
10467 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
10468 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
10469 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
10470 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
10471
10472 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
10473 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
10474 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
10475
10476 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
10477 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
10478 doesn't have any effect.
10479
10480 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
10481 not one per buffer.
10482
10483 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
10484 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
10485 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
10486
10487 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
10488 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
10489 `auto-show-mode' command.
10490
10491 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
10492 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
10493 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
10494 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
10495 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
10496
10497 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
10498 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
10499
10500 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
10501 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
10502 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
10503
10504 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
10505 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
10506 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
10507 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
10508
10509 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
10510
10511 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
10512 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
10513 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
10514 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
10515 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
10516
10517 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
10518 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
10519
10520 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
10521 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
10522 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
10523 `?' on other systems.
10524
10525 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
10526 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
10527 Unix.
10528
10529 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
10530 current codepage when it starts.
10531
10532 ** Mail changes
10533
10534 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
10535 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
10536 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
10537 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
10538 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
10539 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
10540 latin-1:
10541
10542 MIME-version: 1.0
10543 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
10544 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
10545
10546 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
10547 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
10548 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
10549 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
10550 buffer-file-coding-system.
10551
10552 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
10553 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
10554 mail.
10555
10556 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
10557 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
10558 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
10559 list of possible coding systems.
10560
10561 ** CC Mode changes
10562
10563 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
10564 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
10565 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
10566 docstring for details.
10567
10568 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
10569 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
10570 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
10571 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
10572 lineup functions use this feature currently.
10573
10574 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
10575 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
10576
10577 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
10578 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
10579
10580 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
10581 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
10582 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
10583 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
10584 anonymous classes.
10585
10586 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
10587 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
10588
10589 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
10590 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
10591 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
10592 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
10593
10594 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
10595 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
10596 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
10597 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
10598 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
10599
10600 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
10601
10602 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
10603
10604 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
10605 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
10606
10607 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
10608
10609 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
10610 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
10611 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
10612 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
10613 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
10614
10615 ** Gnus changes.
10616
10617 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
10618 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
10619 Gnus manual for the full story.
10620
10621 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
10622 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
10623 group, which is created automatically.
10624
10625 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
10626 values.
10627
10628 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
10629
10630 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
10631 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
10632
10633 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
10634 `C-u C-c C-c'.
10635
10636 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
10637
10638 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
10639 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
10640
10641 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
10642
10643 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
10644 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
10645
10646 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
10647 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
10648
10649 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
10650 control over simplification.
10651
10652 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
10653
10654 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
10655 limit.
10656
10657 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
10658
10659 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
10660
10661 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
10662 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
10663 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
10664
10665 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
10666 `a' forces normal posting method.
10667
10668 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
10669 -- `W d'.
10670
10671 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
10672 to a non-nil value.
10673
10674 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
10675 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
10676
10677 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
10678 has been added.
10679
10680 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
10681
10682 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
10683
10684 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
10685 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
10686
10687 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
10688 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
10689
10690 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
10691
10692 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
10693 been added.
10694
10695 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
10696 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
10697
10698 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
10699 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
10700
10701 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
10702
10703 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
10704
10705 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
10706
10707 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
10708
10709 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
10710 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
10711 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
10712
10713 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
10714 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
10715 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
10716 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
10717 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
10718
10719 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
10720 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
10721 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
10722 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
10723
10724 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
10725 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
10726 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
10727 mismatch.
10728
10729 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
10730
10731 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
10732 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
10733
10734 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
10735 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
10736 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
10737 removed from the label.
10738
10739 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
10740 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
10741
10742 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
10743 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
10744
10745 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
10746 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
10747 expressions.
10748
10749 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
10750
10751 ** New/deleted modes and packages
10752
10753 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
10754 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
10755
10756 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
10757 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
10758 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
10759
10760 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
10761 changes with a special face.
10762
10763 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
10764 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
10765 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
10766 \f
10767 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
10768
10769 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
10770 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
10771 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
10772 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
10773 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
10774
10775 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
10776 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
10777 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
10778
10779 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
10780 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
10781 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
10782 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
10783 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
10784 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
10785 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
10786 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
10787 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
10788
10789 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
10790 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
10791 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
10792 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
10793 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
10794 program.
10795
10796 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
10797 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
10798 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
10799 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
10800 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
10801 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
10802
10803 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
10804 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
10805 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
10806 was not documented clearly before.
10807
10808 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
10809 This includes Tetris and Snake.
10810 \f
10811 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
10812
10813 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
10814 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
10815 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
10816 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
10817
10818 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
10819 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
10820 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
10821
10822 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
10823
10824 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
10825 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
10826
10827 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
10828 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
10829 integers.
10830
10831 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
10832 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
10833 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
10834 file names and attributes are returned.
10835
10836 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
10837 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
10838 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
10839 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
10840 returns the result.
10841
10842 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
10843 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
10844
10845 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
10846
10847 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
10848 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
10849 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
10850 optionally.
10851
10852 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
10853 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
10854
10855 **
10856 The new function process-running-child-p
10857 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
10858 terminal to its own child process.
10859
10860 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
10861 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
10862 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
10863 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
10864
10865 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
10866 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
10867
10868 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
10869 :included is an alias for :visible.
10870
10871 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
10872 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
10873 to move or copy menu entries.
10874
10875 ** Multibyte editing changes
10876
10877 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
10878 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
10879 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
10880 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
10881 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
10882 (setq char (sref str idx)
10883 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
10884 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
10885
10886 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
10887 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
10888 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
10889
10890 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
10891 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
10892 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
10893
10894 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
10895
10896 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
10897 across the boundary.
10898
10899 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
10900 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
10901 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
10902 contains 8-bit characters.
10903 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
10904 contains invalid characters.
10905
10906 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
10907 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
10908 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
10909 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
10910 way.
10911
10912 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
10913 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
10914 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
10915 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
10916
10917 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
10918 compose Thai characters in a string.
10919
10920 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
10921 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
10922 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
10923 menus should always use the third argument.
10924
10925 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
10926 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
10927 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
10928 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
10929
10930 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
10931 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
10932 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
10933 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
10934
10935 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
10936 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
10937 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
10938 echo area contents.
10939
10940 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
10941
10942 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
10943 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
10944 requested feature cannot be loaded.
10945
10946 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
10947 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
10948 means to clear out that attribute.
10949
10950 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
10951 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
10952
10953 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
10954 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
10955 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
10956 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
10957
10958 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
10959 the gap of the current buffer.
10960
10961 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
10962 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
10963 current buffer.
10964
10965 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
10966 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
10967 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
10968 it back in after any modifications have been made.
10969 \f
10970 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
10971
10972 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
10973 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
10974 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
10975 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
10976 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
10977
10978 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
10979 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
10980 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
10981 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
10982 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
10983
10984 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
10985 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
10986 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
10987
10988 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
10989 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
10990 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
10991 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
10992 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
10993 results.
10994
10995 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
10996 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
10997 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
10998 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
10999 \f
11000 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
11001
11002 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
11003 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
11004 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
11005 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
11006
11007 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
11008 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
11009 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
11010 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
11011 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
11012 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
11013 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
11014 region.
11015
11016 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
11017 selective undo.
11018
11019 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
11020 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
11021 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
11022 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
11023 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
11024
11025 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
11026 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
11027 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
11028 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
11029
11030 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
11031 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
11032 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
11033 something that most users not do.
11034
11035 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
11036 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
11037 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
11038 applications.
11039
11040 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
11041 pasting operations.
11042
11043 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
11044 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
11045 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
11046 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
11047 `ps-printer-name'.
11048
11049 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
11050 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
11051 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
11052 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
11053 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
11054 hits a new word.
11055
11056 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
11057 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
11058 to be confused by TeX commands.
11059
11060 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
11061 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
11062 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
11063 of various alternative replacements and actions.
11064
11065 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
11066 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
11067 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
11068 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
11069 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
11070
11071 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
11072 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
11073
11074 ** Changes in input method usage.
11075
11076 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
11077 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
11078 respectively.
11079
11080 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
11081
11082 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
11083 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
11084
11085 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
11086 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
11087
11088 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
11089
11090 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
11091
11092 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
11093 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
11094
11095 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
11096 given in the following case:
11097 o When you are using a complex input method.
11098 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
11099
11100 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
11101 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
11102 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
11103 setting it to t is helpful.
11104
11105 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
11106
11107 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
11108 keys:
11109 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
11110 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
11111 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
11112 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
11113 environment.
11114
11115 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
11116 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
11117 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
11118 get
11119
11120 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
11121
11122 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
11123
11124 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
11125 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
11126
11127 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
11128 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
11129 its owner and group.
11130
11131 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
11132 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
11133
11134 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
11135 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
11136
11137 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
11138 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
11139 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
11140 by the left edge of the rectangle.
11141
11142 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
11143 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
11144 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
11145 for writing keyboard macros.
11146
11147 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
11148 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
11149 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
11150 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
11151 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
11152 info.
11153
11154 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
11155
11156 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
11157 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
11158 contents only.
11159
11160 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
11161 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
11162 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
11163 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
11164
11165 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
11166 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
11167 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
11168
11169 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
11170 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
11171 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
11172 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
11173
11174 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
11175 failure if the command produces no output.
11176
11177 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
11178 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
11179 the mouse.
11180
11181 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
11182 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
11183 function and variable names.
11184
11185 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
11186 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
11187 file-coding-system-alist.
11188
11189 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
11190 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
11191 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
11192 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
11193 according to the current fontset.
11194
11195 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
11196
11197 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
11198 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
11199 nonascii-insert-offset.
11200
11201 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
11202 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
11203 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
11204 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
11205
11206 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
11207 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
11208
11209 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
11210 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
11211
11212 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
11213 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
11214 command keys.
11215
11216 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
11217 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
11218
11219 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
11220 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
11221 all variables that have documentation.
11222
11223 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
11224 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
11225 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
11226 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
11227 it should show; the default is 20.
11228
11229 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
11230 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
11231 of your input.
11232
11233 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
11234 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
11235 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
11236 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
11237 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
11238 Newly added options are included as well.
11239
11240 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
11241 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
11242 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
11243
11244 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
11245 Customize menu.
11246
11247 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
11248 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
11249
11250 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
11251 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
11252 invoked.
11253
11254 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
11255 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
11256 The default is 1.
11257
11258 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
11259 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
11260 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
11261 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
11262 sensibly.
11263
11264 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
11265
11266 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
11267 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
11268 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
11269
11270 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
11271 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
11272 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
11273 every night.
11274
11275 ** Desktop changes
11276
11277 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
11278 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
11279
11280 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
11281 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
11282
11283 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
11284 read and post multi-lingual articles.
11285
11286 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
11287 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
11288 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
11289 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
11290 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
11291 made invisible again.
11292
11293 ** Mail reading and sending changes
11294
11295 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
11296 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
11297 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
11298 toggle.
11299
11300 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
11301 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
11302 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
11303 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
11304 rmail-default-body-file.
11305
11306 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
11307 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
11308 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
11309
11310 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
11311 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
11312 is evaluated to insert the signature.
11313
11314 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
11315 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
11316 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
11317 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
11318 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
11319 especially interested in trying feedmail.
11320
11321 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
11322 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
11323 provided by feedmail are:
11324
11325 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
11326 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
11327 there is also a queue for draft messages
11328
11329 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
11330 be prompted for confirmation
11331
11332 **** does smart filling of address headers
11333
11334 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
11335 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
11336 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
11337
11338 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
11339 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
11340 /usr/lib/sendmail, and Emacs Lisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
11341 function for something else (10-20 lines of Lisp code).
11342
11343 ** Dired changes
11344
11345 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
11346 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
11347
11348 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
11349 run Dired on the directory name at point.
11350
11351 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
11352 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
11353 for a specified regexp.
11354
11355 ** VC Changes
11356
11357 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
11358 conveniently.
11359
11360 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
11361 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
11362 Dired.
11363
11364 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
11365 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
11366 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
11367 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
11368
11369 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
11370 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
11371 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
11372 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
11373 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
11374
11375 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
11376 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
11377 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
11378 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
11379 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
11380
11381 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
11382 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
11383 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
11384 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
11385
11386 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
11387 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
11388 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
11389
11390 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
11391 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
11392 session to resolve them.
11393
11394 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
11395 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
11396 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
11397 uses as well).
11398
11399 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
11400 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
11401 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
11402 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
11403 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
11404 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
11405 using ediff.
11406
11407 ** Changes in Font Lock
11408
11409 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
11410 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
11411 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
11412 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
11413 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
11414
11415 ** Frame name display changes
11416
11417 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
11418 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
11419 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
11420 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
11421
11422 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
11423 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
11424 menu.
11425
11426 ** Comint (subshell) changes
11427
11428 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
11429 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
11430 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
11431
11432 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
11433
11434 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
11435 that is, the line after the last line you got.
11436 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
11437
11438 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
11439 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
11440 the following line.
11441
11442 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
11443 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
11444 previously sent input.
11445
11446 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
11447 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
11448 as the search string.
11449
11450 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
11451 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
11452
11453 ** C mode changes
11454
11455 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
11456 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
11457 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
11458 definition.
11459
11460 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
11461 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
11462 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
11463 style is still the default however.
11464
11465 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
11466
11467 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
11468 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
11469 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
11470
11471 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
11472 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
11473
11474 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
11475 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
11476
11477 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
11478 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
11479
11480 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
11481 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
11482
11483 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
11484 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
11485 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
11486 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
11487
11488 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
11489
11490 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
11491 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
11492 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
11493
11494 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
11495 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
11496 expanding dynamically.
11497
11498 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
11499 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
11500
11501 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
11502 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
11503 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
11504 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
11505
11506 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
11507
11508 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
11509
11510 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
11511 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
11512 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
11513 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
11514 against the first word in the title.
11515
11516 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
11517 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
11518 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
11519 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
11520 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
11521 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
11522
11523 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
11524 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
11525 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
11526 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
11527
11528 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
11529
11530 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
11531 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
11532 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
11533 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
11534 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
11535 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
11536
11537 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
11538 Editing group once the package is loaded.
11539
11540 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
11541 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
11542 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
11543
11544 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
11545 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
11546
11547 ** Ispell changes.
11548
11549 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
11550 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
11551 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
11552
11553 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
11554 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
11555 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
11556 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
11557 include:
11558
11559 o URLs are automatically skipped
11560 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
11561
11562 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
11563
11564 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
11565
11566 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
11567 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
11568 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
11569 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
11570
11571 *** New recursive parser.
11572
11573 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
11574 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
11575 recursive parser scans the individual files.
11576
11577 *** Parsing only part of a document.
11578
11579 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
11580 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
11581 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
11582
11583 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
11584
11585 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
11586
11587 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
11588
11589 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
11590
11591 *** Using multiple selection buffers
11592
11593 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
11594 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
11595
11596 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
11597
11598 *** References to external documents.
11599
11600 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
11601 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
11602 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
11603 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
11604 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
11605 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
11606 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
11607
11608 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
11609
11610 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
11611 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
11612
11613 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
11614 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
11615
11616 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
11617
11618 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
11619 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
11620
11621 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
11622
11623 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
11624 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
11625 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
11626 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
11627 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
11628 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
11629 more.
11630
11631 *** Support for the varioref package
11632
11633 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
11634
11635 *** New hooks
11636
11637 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
11638 and citations are created. These hooks are
11639 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
11640 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
11641
11642 *** Citations outside LaTeX
11643
11644 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
11645 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
11646
11647 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
11648
11649 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
11650 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
11651 fontified, use
11652
11653 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
11654
11655 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
11656 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
11657 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
11658 directories that contain the same file name.
11659
11660 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
11661 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
11662 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
11663 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
11664 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
11665 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
11666 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
11667 directory.
11668
11669 ** New modes and packages
11670
11671 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
11672 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
11673 it, but some do not.
11674
11675 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
11676 code.
11677
11678 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
11679 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
11680 around in a buffer.
11681
11682 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
11683
11684 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
11685 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
11686 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
11687 established system of notation similar to Chess.
11688
11689 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
11690 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
11691 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
11692
11693 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
11694 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
11695 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc.); others are implementations of
11696 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
11697 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
11698 the like.
11699
11700 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
11701 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
11702
11703 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
11704 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
11705 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
11706 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
11707
11708 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
11709
11710 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
11711 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
11712 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
11713 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
11714 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc.)
11715 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
11716 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
11717 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
11718 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
11719 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
11720 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
11721
11722 Platform-specific modes:
11723
11724 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
11725 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
11726 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
11727 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
11728 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
11729 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
11730 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
11731 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
11732 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
11733 \f
11734 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11735
11736 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
11737 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
11738 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
11739 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
11740
11741 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
11742 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
11743 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
11744
11745 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
11746 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
11747 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
11748 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
11749
11750 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
11751 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
11752 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
11753 environment.
11754
11755 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
11756 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
11757 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
11758 current input method for reading this one event.
11759
11760 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
11761 now control whether to output certain characters as
11762 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
11763 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
11764 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
11765 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
11766 \f
11767 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11768
11769 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
11770 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
11771
11772 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
11773 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
11774 always increases point by 1.
11775
11776 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
11777 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
11778
11779 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
11780
11781 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
11782 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
11783 default value changed. For example,
11784
11785 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
11786 :type 'integer
11787 :group 'foo
11788 :version "20.3")
11789
11790 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
11791 :version "20.3")
11792
11793 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
11794 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
11795 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
11796 `:version' in the top level group.
11797
11798 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
11799
11800 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
11801 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
11802
11803 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
11804 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
11805 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
11806 to themselves.
11807
11808 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
11809 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
11810 values whatever.
11811
11812 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
11813 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
11814 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
11815
11816 ** Frame-local variables.
11817
11818 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
11819 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
11820 local bindings for that variable.
11821
11822 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
11823 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
11824 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
11825 parameter name.
11826
11827 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
11828 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
11829 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
11830 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
11831
11832 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
11833 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
11834 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
11835 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
11836
11837 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
11838 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
11839 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
11840 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
11841 See the documentation in sregex.el.
11842
11843 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
11844 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
11845 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
11846 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
11847
11848 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
11849 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
11850
11851 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
11852 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
11853 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
11854
11855 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
11856 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
11857 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
11858 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
11859
11860 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
11861 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
11862 empty input.
11863
11864 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
11865 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
11866 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
11867 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
11868 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
11869
11870 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
11871 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
11872 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
11873 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
11874
11875 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
11876 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
11877 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
11878 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
11879 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
11880
11881 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
11882 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
11883 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
11884 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
11885
11886 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
11887 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
11888 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
11889
11890 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
11891 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
11892 was directed to display this buffer.
11893
11894 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
11895 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
11896 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
11897 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
11898 set-window-configuration.
11899
11900 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
11901 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
11902 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
11903 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
11904
11905 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
11906 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
11907 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
11908
11909 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
11910 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
11911 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
11912
11913 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
11914 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
11915
11916 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
11917 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
11918
11919 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
11920 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
11921 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
11922
11923 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
11924 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
11925 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
11926 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
11927
11928 ** Menu changes
11929
11930 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
11931 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
11932 better supported.
11933
11934 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
11935 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
11936 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
11937 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
11938 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
11939
11940 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
11941
11942 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
11943 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
11944 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
11945 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
11946
11947 The format is:
11948 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
11949 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
11950 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
11951 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
11952 The supported properties include
11953
11954 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
11955 item is enabled.
11956 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
11957 item should appear in the menu.
11958 :filter FILTER-FN
11959 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
11960 which will be REAL-BINDING.
11961 It should return a binding to use instead.
11962 :keys DESCRIPTION
11963 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
11964 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
11965 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
11966 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
11967 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
11968 keyboard binding.
11969 :key-sequence nil
11970 This means that the command normally has no
11971 keyboard equivalent.
11972 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
11973 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
11974 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
11975 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
11976 value says whether this button is currently selected.
11977
11978 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
11979 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
11980
11981 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
11982
11983 ** New event types
11984
11985 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
11986 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
11987 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
11988 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
11989
11990 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
11991
11992 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
11993 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
11994 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
11995 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
11996 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
11997 forward, away from the user.
11998
11999 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12000
12001 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
12002 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
12003 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
12004 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
12005 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
12006
12007 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
12008
12009 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
12010 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
12011 that were dragged and dropped.
12012
12013 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12014
12015 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
12016
12017 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
12018 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
12019 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
12020
12021 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
12022 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
12023 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
12024
12025 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
12026 in Emacs 19 and before.
12027
12028 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
12029 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
12030
12031 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
12032 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
12033 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
12034 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
12035
12036 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
12037 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
12038 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
12039 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
12040 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
12041
12042 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
12043 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
12044 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
12045 consistent with the new representation.
12046
12047 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
12048 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
12049 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
12050 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12051
12052 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
12053 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
12054 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
12055
12056 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
12057 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
12058 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12059
12060 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
12061 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
12062 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
12063
12064 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12065 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
12066
12067 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12068 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
12069
12070 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
12071 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
12072 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
12073 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
12074
12075 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
12076 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
12077
12078 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
12079 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
12080 buffer or string being searched.
12081
12082 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
12083 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
12084 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
12085 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
12086 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
12087 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
12088 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
12089
12090 *** Structure of coding system changed.
12091
12092 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
12093 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
12094 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
12095 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
12096 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
12097 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
12098 define-coding-system-alias.
12099
12100 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
12101 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
12102 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
12103 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
12104 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
12105 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
12106 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
12107 `iso-8859-1'.
12108
12109 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
12110 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
12111 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
12112 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
12113
12114 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
12115 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
12116 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
12117 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
12118
12119 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
12120 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
12121 This function requires a user interaction.
12122
12123 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
12124 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
12125 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
12126 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
12127 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
12128 select-safe-coding-system.
12129
12130 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
12131 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
12132 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
12133 was done.
12134
12135 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
12136 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
12137 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
12138
12139 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
12140 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
12141 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
12142 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
12143
12144 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
12145 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
12146 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
12147 converted.
12148
12149 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
12150 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
12151
12152 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
12153 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
12154 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
12155 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
12156 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
12157 range of characters.
12158
12159 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
12160 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
12161
12162 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
12163 in the current buffer at position POS.
12164
12165 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
12166 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
12167 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
12168 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
12169 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
12170 binding input-method-function to nil.
12171
12172 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
12173 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
12174 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
12175 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
12176 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
12177
12178 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
12179 subsequent events of a key sequence.
12180
12181 *** You can customize any language environment by using
12182 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
12183
12184 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
12185 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
12186 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
12187 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
12188 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
12189 \f
12190 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
12191
12192 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
12193 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
12194 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
12195 tree structure.
12196
12197 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
12198 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
12199
12200 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
12201 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
12202 in your .emacs file.)
12203
12204 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
12205 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
12206
12207 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
12208 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
12209
12210 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
12211 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
12212 kills the region.
12213
12214 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
12215 delete the character before point, as usual.
12216
12217 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
12218 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
12219 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
12220
12221 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
12222 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
12223 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
12224 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
12225 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
12226 past.)
12227
12228 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
12229 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
12230 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
12231 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
12232 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
12233
12234 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
12235 and is an alias for it.
12236
12237 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
12238 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
12239
12240 ** Scrolling changes
12241
12242 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
12243 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
12244
12245 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
12246 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
12247 where it started.
12248
12249 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
12250 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
12251 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
12252 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
12253
12254 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
12255 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
12256 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
12257 recenters the window.
12258
12259 ** International character set support (MULE)
12260
12261 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
12262 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
12263 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
12264 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
12265 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
12266 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
12267
12268 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
12269 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
12270 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
12271 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
12272 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
12273
12274 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
12275 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
12276 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
12277 language, to make it possible to type them.
12278
12279 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
12280 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
12281
12282 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
12283 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
12284
12285 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
12286
12287 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
12288
12289 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
12290 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
12291 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
12292 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
12293 characters for their work until they want to change.
12294
12295 *** Input methods
12296
12297 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
12298 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
12299 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
12300 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
12301 support several input methods.
12302
12303 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
12304 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
12305 work.
12306
12307 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
12308 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
12309 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
12310 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
12311 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
12312 letter.
12313
12314 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
12315 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
12316 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
12317 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
12318 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
12319
12320 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
12321 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
12322 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
12323 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
12324
12325 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
12326 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
12327 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
12328 the first guess is wrong.
12329
12330 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
12331 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
12332
12333 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
12334 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
12335 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
12336 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
12337
12338 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
12339 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
12340 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
12341 translate automatically to and from either one.
12342
12343 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
12344
12345 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
12346 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
12347 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
12348 what you want.
12349
12350 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
12351 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
12352 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
12353 multibyte characters in that buffer.
12354
12355 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
12356 character conversion as well.
12357
12358 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
12359
12360 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
12361 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
12362 requires using many fonts.
12363
12364 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
12365 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
12366
12367 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
12368 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
12369 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
12370 you would use a font.
12371
12372 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
12373 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
12374 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
12375
12376 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
12377 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
12378 characters).
12379
12380 *** Defining fontsets.
12381
12382 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
12383 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
12384 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
12385
12386 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
12387 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
12388 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
12389 standard fontset are created automatically.
12390
12391 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
12392 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
12393 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
12394 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
12395 name is `fontset-startup'.
12396
12397 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
12398 The resource value should have this form:
12399 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
12400 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
12401 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
12402 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
12403 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
12404 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
12405 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
12406 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
12407 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
12408
12409 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
12410 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
12411 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
12412
12413 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
12414 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
12415 following resource,
12416 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
12417 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
12418 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
12419 Here is the substitution rule:
12420 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
12421 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
12422 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
12423 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
12424 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
12425
12426 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
12427 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
12428 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
12429
12430 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
12431 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
12432 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
12433 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
12434 fontsets.
12435
12436 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
12437 defaults for a particular choice of language.
12438
12439 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
12440 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
12441 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
12442 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
12443 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
12444 system for new files that you create.
12445
12446 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
12447 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
12448 whole Emacs session.
12449
12450 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
12451 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
12452 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
12453
12454 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
12455 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
12456 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
12457 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
12458 coding systems that Emacs supports.
12459
12460 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
12461 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
12462 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
12463 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
12464 is used for *the immediately following command*.
12465
12466 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
12467 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
12468
12469 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
12470 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
12471
12472 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
12473 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
12474
12475 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
12476 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
12477 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
12478 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
12479 of the file.
12480
12481 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
12482 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
12483 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
12484 translated into that character code.
12485
12486 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
12487 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
12488
12489 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
12490
12491 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
12492 the coding system for keyboard input.
12493
12494 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
12495 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
12496 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
12497
12498 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
12499
12500 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
12501 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
12502 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
12503 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
12504 designed to work with terminals.
12505
12506 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
12507 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
12508 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
12509 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
12510 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
12511 in the corresponding buffer.
12512
12513 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
12514
12515 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
12516 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
12517 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
12518
12519 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
12520 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
12521 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
12522 want to use.
12523
12524 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
12525 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
12526
12527 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
12528 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
12529 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
12530 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
12531
12532 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
12533 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
12534 related information.
12535
12536 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
12537 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
12538 scripts.
12539
12540 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
12541 information about the support for a particular language.
12542 You specify the language as an argument.
12543
12544 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
12545 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
12546 first dash.
12547
12548 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
12549 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
12550 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
12551 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
12552
12553 A alternativnyj (Russian)
12554 B big5 (Chinese)
12555 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
12556 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
12557 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
12558 E euc-japan (Japanese)
12559 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12560 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
12561 K euc-korea (Korean)
12562 R koi8 (Russian)
12563 Q tibetan
12564 S shift_jis (Japanese)
12565 T lao
12566 T tis620 (Thai)
12567 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
12568 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12569 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
12570 v viqr (Vietnamese)
12571 z hz (Chinese)
12572
12573 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
12574 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
12575 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
12576 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
12577
12578 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
12579 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
12580
12581 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
12582 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
12583 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
12584 Rmail files themselves.
12585
12586 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
12587 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
12588
12589 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
12590 for sending mail:
12591
12592 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
12593 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
12594 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
12595 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
12596 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
12597
12598 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
12599 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
12600 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
12601 translations.
12602
12603 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
12604 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
12605 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
12606 without any conversion.
12607
12608 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
12609 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
12610 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
12611 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
12612
12613 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
12614 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
12615
12616 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
12617 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
12618
12619 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
12620 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
12621
12622 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
12623 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
12624 in the buffer before point.
12625
12626 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
12627 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
12628 you are using.
12629
12630 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
12631 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
12632
12633 ** File locking works with NFS now.
12634
12635 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
12636 in the same directory as FILENAME.
12637
12638 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
12639 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
12640 can become a bottleneck.
12641
12642 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
12643 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
12644 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
12645 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
12646 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
12647 so useful that the change is worth while.
12648
12649 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
12650 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
12651 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
12652 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
12653
12654 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
12655 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
12656 show-paren-mode.
12657
12658 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
12659 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
12660 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
12661
12662 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
12663 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
12664 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
12665
12666 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
12667 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
12668 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
12669
12670 ** Changes in View mode.
12671
12672 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
12673 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
12674
12675 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
12676 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
12677
12678 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
12679 previous state.
12680
12681 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
12682 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
12683
12684 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
12685 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
12686 not just the selected window.
12687
12688 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
12689 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
12690 turns View mode on or off.
12691
12692 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
12693 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
12694 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
12695
12696 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
12697 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
12698
12699 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
12700 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
12701 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
12702 which version to compare with.
12703
12704 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
12705 blocks if a match is inside the block.
12706
12707 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
12708 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
12709 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
12710 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
12711
12712 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
12713 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
12714 blocks, all of them or none.
12715
12716 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
12717 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
12718 confirmation first.
12719
12720 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
12721 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
12722 However, the mode will not be changed if
12723 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
12724 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
12725 not suitable for ordinary files, or
12726 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
12727
12728 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
12729
12730 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
12731 these commands do not change the major mode.
12732
12733 ** M-x occur changes.
12734
12735 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
12736 it performs a case-sensitive search.
12737
12738 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
12739 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
12740 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
12741
12742 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
12743 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
12744 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
12745 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
12746 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
12747
12748 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
12749 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
12750 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
12751 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
12752
12753 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
12754 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
12755 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
12756
12757 ** Outline mode changes.
12758
12759 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
12760
12761 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
12762
12763 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
12764 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
12765 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
12766 was already active.
12767
12768 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
12769 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
12770 get confused by it.
12771
12772 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
12773 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
12774
12775 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
12776
12777 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
12778 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
12779 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
12780 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
12781
12782 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
12783 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
12784 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
12785
12786 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
12787 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
12788 values.
12789
12790 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
12791 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
12792 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
12793 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
12794
12795 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
12796 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
12797 can be. The default value is 30.
12798
12799 ** Changes in Mail mode.
12800
12801 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
12802 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
12803 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
12804 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
12805 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
12806 behavior.
12807
12808 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
12809 compose-mail-other-frame.
12810
12811 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
12812 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
12813 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
12814 buffer that shows the original message.
12815
12816 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
12817 with separator lines around the contents.
12818
12819 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
12820 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
12821 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
12822 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
12823
12824 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
12825
12826 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
12827 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
12828 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
12829 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
12830
12831 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
12832 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
12833 /etc/passwd.
12834
12835 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
12836 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
12837 /etc/passwd.
12838
12839 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
12840 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
12841 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
12842 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
12843
12844 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
12845 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
12846 be taken to be magic.
12847
12848 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
12849 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
12850 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
12851
12852 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
12853 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
12854
12855 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
12856 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
12857
12858 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
12859
12860 new key dired.el binding old key
12861 ------- ---------------- -------
12862 * c dired-change-marks c
12863 * m dired-mark m
12864 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
12865 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
12866 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
12867 * u dired-unmark u
12868 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
12869 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
12870 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
12871 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
12872 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
12873 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
12874
12875 ** Rmail changes.
12876
12877 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
12878 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
12879 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
12880 each time you run it.
12881
12882 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
12883 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
12884
12885 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
12886 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
12887 means to move in the opposite direction.
12888
12889 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
12890 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
12891
12892 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
12893 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
12894 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
12895 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
12896 for output.
12897
12898 ** Gnus changes.
12899
12900 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
12901
12902 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
12903 Gnus.
12904
12905 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
12906 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
12907
12908 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
12909 article mode line.
12910
12911 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
12912
12913 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
12914
12915 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
12916
12917 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
12918 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
12919 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
12920
12921 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
12922
12923 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
12924
12925 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
12926 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
12927
12928 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
12929 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
12930 used to pick articles.
12931
12932 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
12933 another have been added.
12934
12935 `M-x gnus-change-server'
12936
12937 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
12938 generating lines in buffers.
12939
12940 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
12941 `C-M-_'.
12942
12943 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
12944
12945 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
12946
12947 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
12948
12949 *** Scores can be decayed.
12950
12951 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
12952
12953 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
12954 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
12955
12956 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
12957 the native server.
12958
12959 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
12960
12961 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
12962 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
12963
12964 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
12965
12966 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
12967 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
12968
12969 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
12970 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
12971
12972 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
12973 a group.
12974
12975 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
12976 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
12977
12978 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
12979
12980 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
12981
12982 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
12983
12984 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
12985
12986 Use the `Y c' command.
12987
12988 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
12989
12990 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
12991
12992 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
12993
12994 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
12995 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
12996
12997 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
12998
12999 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
13000
13001 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
13002 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
13003
13004 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
13005
13006 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
13007 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
13008 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
13009 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
13010 this issue.)
13011
13012 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
13013 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
13014 particular news group. This can be done by:
13015
13016 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
13017
13018 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
13019 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
13020 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
13021 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
13022 for reading and posting).
13023
13024 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
13025 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
13026 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
13027 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
13028 there.
13029
13030 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
13031 default. Here are some of these default settings:
13032
13033 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
13034 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
13035 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
13036 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
13037 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
13038
13039 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
13040 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
13041
13042 ** CC mode changes.
13043
13044 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
13045 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
13046 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
13047 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
13048 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
13049 loaded.
13050
13051 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
13052 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
13053 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
13054 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
13055 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
13056 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
13057
13058 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
13059 of the current buffer.
13060
13061 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
13062 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
13063 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
13064
13065 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
13066 style that the Python developers like.
13067
13068 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
13069 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
13070 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
13071
13072 ** VC Changes [new]
13073
13074 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
13075 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
13076 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
13077
13078 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
13079 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
13080 developers.
13081
13082 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
13083 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
13084
13085 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
13086 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
13087 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
13088 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
13089
13090 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
13091 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
13092
13093 ** Calendar changes.
13094
13095 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
13096 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
13097 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
13098 following/previous years.
13099
13100 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
13101 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
13102 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
13103 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
13104 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
13105 supposed attribute of God.
13106
13107 ** ps-print changes
13108
13109 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
13110 layout.
13111
13112 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
13113
13114 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
13115 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
13116 printer system has this behavior, set variable
13117 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
13118
13119 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
13120 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
13121 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
13122
13123 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
13124 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
13125
13126 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
13127 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
13128 printing for your printer.
13129
13130 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
13131 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13132
13133 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
13134 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13135
13136 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
13137 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
13138 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
13139 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
13140 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
13141 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
13142 The default value is nil.
13143
13144 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
13145 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
13146
13147 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
13148 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
13149 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
13150 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
13151 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
13152 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
13153 color). The default is 0 ("black").
13154
13155 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
13156 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
13157
13158 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
13159 The default is 0 ("black").
13160
13161 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
13162 The default is 0 ("black").
13163
13164 border-width Specify the border width.
13165 The default is 0.4.
13166
13167 Any other property is ignored.
13168
13169 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
13170 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
13171 documentation).
13172
13173 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
13174 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
13175 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
13176 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
13177 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
13178 controlling headers.
13179
13180 *** Color management (subgroup)
13181
13182 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
13183 color.
13184
13185 *** Face Management (subgroup)
13186
13187 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
13188 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
13189 background should be used. Valid values are:
13190
13191 t always use face background color.
13192 nil never use face background color.
13193 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
13194
13195 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
13196
13197 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
13198 sheet of paper.
13199
13200 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
13201 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
13202
13203 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
13204 each page.
13205
13206 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
13207 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
13208 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
13209
13210 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
13211 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
13212 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
13213
13214 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
13215 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
13216 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
13217
13218 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
13219 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
13220 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
13221
13222 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
13223 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
13224 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
13225
13226 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
13227
13228 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
13229
13230 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
13231 RGB color.
13232
13233 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
13234 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
13235 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
13236
13237 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
13238 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13239 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13240 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13241 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13242 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
13243 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
13244 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
13245 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13246 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13247 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13248 10 + 10 +
13249 11 + 11 +
13250 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13251 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13252 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
13253 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
13254 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
13255 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13256 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13257 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13258 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
13259 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
13260 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
13261 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
13262 22 + 22 +
13263 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13264
13265 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
13266
13267
13268 *** Printer management (subgroup)
13269
13270 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
13271 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
13272 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
13273 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
13274 to "-P".
13275
13276 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
13277 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
13278 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
13279
13280 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
13281 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
13282 do so.
13283
13284 *** Page settings (subgroup)
13285
13286 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
13287 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
13288 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
13289 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
13290 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
13291 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
13292 `setpagedevice'.
13293
13294 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
13295 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
13296 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
13297
13298 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
13299 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
13300 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
13301 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
13302 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
13303 its TO, are ignored.
13304
13305 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
13306 pages. Valid values are:
13307
13308 nil print all pages.
13309
13310 `even-page' print only even pages.
13311
13312 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
13313
13314 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
13315 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13316 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
13317 print only the even sheet of paper.
13318
13319 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
13320 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13321 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
13322 only the odd sheet of paper.
13323
13324 Any other value is treated as nil.
13325
13326 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
13327 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
13328 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
13329
13330 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
13331
13332 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
13333 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
13334
13335 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
13336 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13337 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
13338 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13339 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13340 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13341 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13342
13343 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
13344 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13345 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
13346 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
13347 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
13348 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
13349 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
13350
13351 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
13352
13353 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
13354 messages should be sent.
13355
13356 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
13357 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
13358 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
13359
13360 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
13361
13362 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
13363 points for line numbers.
13364
13365 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
13366 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
13367
13368 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
13369 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
13370 to 2, the printing will look like:
13371
13372 1 one line
13373 one line
13374 3 one line
13375 one line
13376 5 one line
13377 one line
13378 ...
13379
13380 Valid values are:
13381
13382 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
13383 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
13384 is used.
13385
13386 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
13387 zebra stripe is to be printed.
13388
13389 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
13390
13391 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
13392 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
13393 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
13394 3, the output will look like:
13395
13396 one line
13397 one line
13398 3 one line
13399 one line
13400 one line
13401 6 one line
13402 one line
13403 one line
13404 9 one line
13405 one line
13406 ...
13407
13408 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
13409 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
13410
13411 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
13412 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13413 `ps-font-size').
13414
13415 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
13416 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13417 `ps-font-size').
13418
13419 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
13420
13421 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
13422 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
13423
13424 ** hideshow changes.
13425
13426 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
13427 C++, ; for lisp).
13428
13429 *** Support for java-mode added.
13430
13431 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
13432 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
13433
13434 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
13435 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
13436 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
13437
13438 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
13439 robust and a lot faster.
13440
13441 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
13442
13443 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
13444 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
13445 documentation for more details.
13446
13447 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
13448
13449 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
13450 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
13451 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
13452 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
13453 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
13454
13455 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
13456 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
13457 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
13458 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
13459
13460 ** Font Lock mode
13461
13462 *** Custom support
13463
13464 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
13465 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify
13466 the faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new
13467 custom group font-lock-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in your
13468 ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
13469 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
13470
13471 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
13472
13473 *** Maximum decoration
13474
13475 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
13476 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
13477 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
13478 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
13479 to get the old behavior.
13480
13481 *** New support
13482
13483 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
13484
13485 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
13486 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
13487
13488 *** Configurable support
13489
13490 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
13491 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
13492 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
13493 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
13494 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
13495 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
13496 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
13497
13498 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
13499 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
13500 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
13501
13502 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
13503
13504 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
13505 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
13506 for any mode.
13507
13508 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
13509
13510 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
13511
13512 in your ~/.emacs.
13513
13514 *** New faces
13515
13516 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
13517 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
13518 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
13519 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
13520
13521 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
13522
13523 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
13524 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
13525 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
13526
13527 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
13528
13529 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
13530 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
13531 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
13532 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
13533 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
13534 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
13535 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode.
13536
13537 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
13538 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
13539 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
13540 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
13541 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
13542 the command M-o M-o (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
13543
13544 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
13545
13546 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
13547 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
13548 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
13549 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
13550
13551 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
13552 settings.
13553
13554 ** Ada mode changes.
13555
13556 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
13557 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
13558 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
13559 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
13560 stubs.
13561
13562 *** There are two new commands:
13563 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
13564 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
13565
13566 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
13567 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
13568 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
13569
13570 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
13571 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
13572 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
13573
13574 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
13575 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
13576 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
13577 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
13578
13579 ** Scheme mode changes.
13580
13581 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
13582 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
13583 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
13584 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
13585 have any effect.
13586
13587 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
13588 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
13589 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
13590 variables as buffer-local variables.
13591
13592 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
13593 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
13594
13595 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
13596
13597 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
13598 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
13599 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
13600 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
13601
13602 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
13603 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
13604 buffer in Emacs.
13605
13606 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
13607 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
13608 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
13609 option takes precedence.
13610
13611 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
13612 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
13613 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
13614
13615 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
13616 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
13617 the current defun.
13618
13619 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
13620 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
13621
13622 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
13623 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
13624 necessary).
13625
13626 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
13627 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
13628 these register values no longer become completely useless.
13629 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
13630 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
13631 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
13632
13633 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
13634 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
13635 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
13636 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
13637
13638 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
13639 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
13640 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
13641 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
13642 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
13643
13644 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
13645 since it applies only to the current frame.
13646
13647 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
13648 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
13649 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
13650
13651 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
13652 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
13653 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
13654 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
13655 instead of just the file you are editing.
13656
13657 ** RefTeX mode
13658
13659 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
13660 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
13661 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
13662 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
13663 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
13664
13665 C-c ( reftex-label
13666 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
13667 knows which kind of label is needed.
13668
13669 C-c ) reftex-reference
13670 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
13671 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
13672
13673 C-c [ reftex-citation
13674 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
13675 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
13676
13677 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
13678 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
13679
13680 C-c = reftex-toc
13681 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
13682 can quickly jump to every section.
13683
13684 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
13685 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
13686 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
13687 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
13688 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
13689
13690 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
13691
13692 *** Info documentation is now available.
13693
13694 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
13695 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
13696
13697 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
13698 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
13699
13700 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
13701 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
13702
13703 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
13704 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
13705 appropriate functions.
13706
13707 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
13708 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
13709
13710 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
13711 been cleaned.
13712
13713 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
13714 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
13715
13716 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
13717 shall be delimited.
13718
13719 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
13720 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
13721 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
13722
13723 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
13724 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
13725 prefixed with `ALT'.
13726
13727 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
13728 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
13729 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
13730 documentation).
13731
13732 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
13733 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
13734 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
13735
13736 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
13737 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
13738
13739 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
13740 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
13741 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
13742
13743 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
13744
13745 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
13746
13747 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
13748 from alien sources.
13749
13750 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
13751 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
13752 crossref entries.
13753
13754 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
13755 region.
13756
13757 *** Added support for imenu.
13758
13759 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
13760 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
13761 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
13762 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
13763
13764 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
13765 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
13766
13767 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
13768
13769 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
13770
13771 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
13772 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
13773 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
13774 as an argument.
13775
13776 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
13777 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
13778
13779 ** browse-url changes
13780
13781 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
13782 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
13783 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
13784 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
13785 customization variables.
13786
13787 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
13788
13789 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
13790 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
13791 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
13792
13793 ** Changes in Ediff
13794
13795 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
13796 pops up the Info file for this command.
13797
13798 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
13799 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
13800 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
13801 directories).
13802
13803 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
13804 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
13805 files in the same directory.
13806
13807 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
13808 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
13809 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
13810
13811 ** Changes in Viper
13812
13813 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
13814 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
13815 instead of vip-.
13816 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
13817 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
13818 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
13819 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
13820 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
13821 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
13822 color when Viper is in insert state.
13823 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
13824 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
13825 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
13826
13827 ** Etags changes.
13828
13829 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
13830 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
13831 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
13832 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
13833 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
13834
13835 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
13836
13837 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
13838 constructs are tagged. Files are recognized by the extension .java.
13839
13840 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
13841 recognized by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
13842 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
13843
13844 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
13845 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
13846 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
13847 methods and protocols.
13848
13849 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognized by the extension
13850 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
13851 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
13852 paragraph name.
13853
13854 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
13855 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
13856 at least M times and as many as N times.
13857
13858 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
13859 in files has changed slightly.
13860
13861 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
13862 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
13863 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
13864 with old time-stamp-format values.
13865
13866 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
13867 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
13868 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
13869 reasons.
13870
13871 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
13872 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
13873 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
13874 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
13875 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
13876 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
13877
13878 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
13879 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
13880 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
13881
13882 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
13883 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
13884 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
13885 recommended now will continue to work then.
13886
13887 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
13888 details.
13889
13890 ** There are some additional major modes:
13891
13892 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
13893 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
13894 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
13895
13896 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
13897 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
13898 into Emacs.
13899
13900 ** New Lisp packages include:
13901
13902 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
13903
13904 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
13905 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
13906
13907 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
13908
13909 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
13910 in shell buffers.
13911
13912 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
13913 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
13914 and `elint-defun'.
13915
13916 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
13917 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
13918 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
13919 strings or comments.
13920
13921 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
13922 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
13923 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
13924 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
13925 at these points.
13926
13927 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
13928 can visit them by short forms of their names.
13929
13930 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
13931 Emacs Lisp function at point.
13932
13933 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
13934
13935 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
13936 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
13937
13938 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
13939
13940 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
13941
13942 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
13943
13944 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
13945 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
13946
13947 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
13948 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
13949 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
13950 original place after inserting the copy.
13951
13952 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
13953 on the buffer.
13954
13955 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
13956 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
13957 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
13958
13959 Enable mouse-drag with:
13960 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
13961 -or-
13962 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
13963
13964 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
13965 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
13966
13967 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
13968 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
13969
13970 *** ogonek
13971
13972 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
13973 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
13974 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
13975 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
13976 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
13977 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
13978 instance) and vice versa.
13979
13980 To use this package load it using
13981 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
13982 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
13983 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
13984 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
13985 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
13986 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
13987
13988 *** Interface to ph.
13989
13990 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
13991
13992 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
13993 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
13994 these servers.
13995
13996 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
13997
13998 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
13999 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
14000 while the real cursor does not move.
14001
14002 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
14003 for visiting your favorite web sites.
14004
14005 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
14006 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
14007
14008 ** movemail change
14009
14010 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
14011 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
14012 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
14013 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
14014
14015 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
14016 \f
14017 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
14018
14019 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
14020
14021 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
14022 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
14023 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
14024 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
14025 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
14026
14027 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
14028 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
14029 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
14030 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
14031 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
14032 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
14033 \f
14034 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
14035
14036 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
14037 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
14038 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
14039 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
14040
14041 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
14042 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
14043
14044 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
14045 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
14046 "win".
14047
14048 ** Basic Lisp changes
14049
14050 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
14051 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
14052
14053 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
14054 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
14055 or by the user.
14056
14057 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
14058
14059 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
14060
14061 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
14062 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
14063
14064 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
14065 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
14066 its argument.
14067
14068 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
14069
14070 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
14071
14072 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
14073
14074 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
14075 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
14076 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
14077 `format' function.
14078
14079 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
14080 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
14081 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
14082
14083 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
14084 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
14085 adding one of these suffixes.
14086
14087 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
14088 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
14089 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
14090
14091 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
14092 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
14093
14094 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
14095
14096 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
14097 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
14098
14099 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
14100 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
14101
14102 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
14103
14104 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
14105 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
14106
14107 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
14108 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
14109 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
14110 works using `save-current-buffer'.
14111
14112 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
14113 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
14114 of the last form.
14115
14116 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
14117 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
14118 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
14119 as the last form.
14120
14121 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
14122 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
14123 matches.
14124
14125 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
14126
14127 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
14128 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
14129 Then it returns that string.
14130
14131 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
14132
14133 (with-output-to-string
14134 (princ "The buffer is ")
14135 (princ (buffer-name)))
14136
14137 returns "The buffer is foo".
14138
14139 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
14140 is non-nil.
14141
14142 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
14143 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
14144 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
14145
14146 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
14147 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
14148
14149 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
14150 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
14151 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
14152 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
14153 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
14154 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
14155
14156 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
14157 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
14158 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
14159 characters".
14160
14161 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
14162 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
14163 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
14164 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
14165 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
14166
14167 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
14168 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
14169 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
14170 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
14171
14172 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
14173 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
14174
14175 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
14176
14177 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
14178 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
14179 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
14180 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
14181 guaranteed.
14182
14183 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
14184 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
14185 character).
14186
14187 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
14188
14189 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
14190 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
14191 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
14192 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
14193 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
14194
14195 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
14196
14197 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
14198 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
14199 more than the number of characters.
14200
14201 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
14202 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
14203 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
14204 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
14205 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
14206 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
14207
14208 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
14209 and returns a string containing those characters.
14210
14211 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
14212 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
14213 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
14214 character, sref signals an error.
14215
14216 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
14217 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
14218 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14219
14220 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
14221 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
14222 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14223
14224 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
14225 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
14226 to a vector of the characters in it.
14227
14228 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
14229 of a string. You call it as follows:
14230
14231 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
14232
14233 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
14234 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
14235 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
14236 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
14237 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
14238
14239 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
14240 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14241
14242 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
14243 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14244
14245 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
14246 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
14247 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
14248 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
14249
14250 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
14251
14252 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
14253
14254 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
14255 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
14256 are not included in the resulting value.
14257
14258 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
14259 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
14260 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
14261 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
14262
14263 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
14264 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
14265 character extends across that column), then the padding character
14266 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
14267 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
14268 column START-COLUMN.
14269
14270 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
14271 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
14272 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
14273 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
14274 changed text, before the change.
14275
14276 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
14277 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
14278 one character set for each script, not for each language.
14279
14280 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
14281
14282 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
14283
14284 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
14285 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
14286
14287 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
14288 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
14289 which identify the character within that character set.
14290
14291 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
14292 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
14293 opposite of split-char.
14294
14295 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
14296 of all the characters between BEG and END.
14297
14298 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
14299 of all the characters in a string.
14300
14301 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
14302 and specifying coding systems.
14303
14304 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
14305 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
14306 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
14307 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
14308 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
14309 as what to do about code conversion.)
14310
14311 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
14312 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
14313
14314 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14315 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14316 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
14317
14318 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14319 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
14320 to match against a file name.
14321
14322 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14323 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14324 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14325 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14326 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14327 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14328
14329 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14330 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14331
14332 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
14333 the coding system to use for network sockets.
14334
14335 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14336 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
14337 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
14338 service names.
14339
14340 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14341 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14342 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14343 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14344 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14345 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14346
14347 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14348 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14349
14350 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14351 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14352 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
14353 start the subprocess.
14354
14355 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
14356 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
14357 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
14358 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
14359 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
14360
14361 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
14362 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
14363 subprocess.
14364
14365 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
14366 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
14367 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
14368 connection permanently or until overridden.
14369
14370 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
14371 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
14372 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
14373 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
14374 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
14375 system for one operation at a time.
14376
14377 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
14378 files, subprocesses or network connections.
14379
14380 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
14381 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
14382 The value is a cons cell,
14383 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
14384 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
14385 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
14386 input to the subprocess.
14387
14388 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
14389 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
14390
14391 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
14392 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
14393 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
14394
14395 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
14396 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
14397 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
14398 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
14399 customization.
14400
14401 Thus, instead of writing
14402
14403 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
14404 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
14405
14406 you would now write this:
14407
14408 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
14409 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
14410 :type 'boolean
14411 :group foo)
14412
14413 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
14414 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
14415 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
14416 for a description of them.
14417
14418 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
14419 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
14420
14421 (defgroup ispell nil
14422 "Spell checking using Ispell."
14423 :group 'processes)
14424
14425 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
14426 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
14427 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
14428 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
14429 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
14430
14431 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
14432 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
14433 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
14434 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
14435 first-level subgroups.
14436
14437 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
14438
14439 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
14440 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
14441
14442 ** easy-mmode
14443
14444 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
14445 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
14446 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
14447 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
14448 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
14449 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
14450
14451 ** Text property changes
14452
14453 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
14454 text property.
14455
14456 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
14457 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
14458 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
14459 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
14460 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
14461
14462 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
14463 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
14464 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
14465 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
14466
14467 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
14468 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
14469 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
14470
14471 ** Changes in invisibility features
14472
14473 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
14474 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
14475 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
14476 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
14477 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
14478 make the overlay visible.
14479
14480 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
14481 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
14482 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
14483 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
14484 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
14485 t when it should hide it.
14486
14487 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
14488
14489 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
14490 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
14491 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
14492 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
14493 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
14494 Here is an example of how to do this:
14495
14496 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
14497 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14498 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
14499 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14500
14501 ...
14502 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
14503
14504 ...
14505 ;; When done with the overlays:
14506 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14507 ;; Or respectively:
14508 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14509
14510 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
14511
14512 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
14513 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
14514 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
14515 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
14516
14517 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
14518 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
14519 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
14520
14521 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
14522 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
14523
14524 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
14525 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
14526
14527 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
14528 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
14529 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
14530
14531 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
14532 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
14533 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
14534 determine the syntax type of the character.
14535
14536 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
14537 of the current buffer.
14538
14539 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
14540 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
14541 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
14542
14543 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
14544 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
14545 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
14546 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
14547 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
14548
14549 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
14550 text property.
14551
14552 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
14553 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
14554 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
14555
14556 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
14557 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
14558 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
14559 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
14560 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
14561
14562 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
14563 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
14564 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
14565
14566 ** Changes in face features
14567
14568 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
14569 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
14570
14571 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
14572 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
14573
14574 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
14575 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
14576
14577 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
14578 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
14579
14580 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
14581 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
14582 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
14583 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
14584 overlay property).
14585
14586 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
14587 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
14588
14589 ** Changes in file-handling functions
14590
14591 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
14592 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
14593 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
14594 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
14595
14596 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
14597 begins with ~.
14598
14599 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
14600 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
14601
14602 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
14603 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
14604
14605 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
14606 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
14607
14608 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
14609 character code conversion as well as other things.
14610
14611 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
14612 (formerly it did not).
14613
14614 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
14615 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
14616
14617 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
14618 instead of constant strings.
14619
14620 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
14621 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
14622 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
14623
14624 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
14625 in the same way as before.
14626
14627 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
14628 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
14629 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
14630
14631 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
14632 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
14633 else, and returns nil.
14634
14635 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
14636 directory cannot be listed.
14637
14638 ** Changes in minibuffer input
14639
14640 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
14641 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
14642 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
14643 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
14644 ways:
14645
14646 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
14647 It is available through the history command M-n.
14648
14649 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
14650 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
14651 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
14652 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
14653 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
14654
14655 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
14656 argument in this way.
14657
14658 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
14659 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
14660 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
14661
14662 ** Echo area features
14663
14664 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
14665 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
14666 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
14667 after the echo area is cleared.
14668
14669 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
14670 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
14671
14672 ** Keyboard input features
14673
14674 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
14675 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
14676
14677 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
14678 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
14679 by keyboard macros.
14680
14681 ** Frame-related changes
14682
14683 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
14684 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
14685 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
14686
14687 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
14688 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
14689 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
14690
14691 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
14692 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
14693 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
14694 in the selected frame.
14695
14696 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
14697 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
14698 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
14699
14700 ** X Windows features
14701
14702 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
14703 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
14704 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
14705
14706 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
14707 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
14708
14709 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
14710 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
14711 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
14712
14713 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
14714 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
14715
14716 ** Subprocess features
14717
14718 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
14719 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
14720 automatically.
14721
14722 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
14723 and returns the output from the command as a string.
14724
14725 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
14726 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
14727
14728 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
14729 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
14730
14731 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
14732 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
14733 goes after the other menu items.
14734
14735 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
14736 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
14737 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
14738 are in use.
14739
14740 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
14741 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
14742
14743 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
14744 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
14745 form.
14746
14747 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
14748 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
14749 but its hook is still run.
14750
14751 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
14752 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
14753
14754 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
14755 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
14756 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
14757
14758 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
14759 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
14760 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
14761 warned.
14762
14763 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
14764 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
14765
14766 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
14767 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
14768 functions like display-time.
14769
14770 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
14771 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
14772
14773 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
14774 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
14775 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
14776
14777 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
14778 if there is an error in compilation.
14779
14780 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
14781 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
14782 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
14783 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
14784
14785 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
14786 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
14787 the *scratch* buffer.
14788
14789 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
14790 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
14791 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
14792 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
14793
14794 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
14795 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
14796 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
14797
14798 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
14799 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
14800 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
14801 and compose-mail-other-frame.
14802
14803 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
14804 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
14805 full name of the specified user will be returned.
14806
14807 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
14808 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
14809 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
14810 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
14811 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
14812 files at all.
14813
14814 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
14815 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
14816 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
14817 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
14818
14819 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
14820 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
14821 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
14822 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
14823
14824 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
14825
14826 ** imenu.el changes.
14827
14828 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
14829 item from menu created by imenu.
14830
14831 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
14832 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
14833 select one of those items.
14834 \f
14835 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
14836
14837 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
14838 Copyright information:
14839
14840 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
14841 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14842
14843 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
14844 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
14845 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
14846 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
14847
14848 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
14849 of this document, or of portions of it,
14850 under the above conditions, provided also that they
14851 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
14852 \f
14853 Local variables:
14854 mode: outline
14855 paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
14856 end:
14857
14858 arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793